technical data & service manual

TECHNICAL DATA&

SERVICE MANUAL

Indoor Unit

Indoor Unit

Outdoor Unit ( )

Outdoor Unit

REFERENCE NO. SM83016185464849261000

Class 18 25 36 48

X 4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed

SPW-XDR184GH56(A/B)

SPW-XDR254GH56(A/B)

SPW-XDR364GH56(A/B)

SPW-XDR484GH56(A/B)

X185H X255H X365H X485H

XM SPW-XM185H

US SPW-US185H

K Wall-Mounted SPW-KR184GH56(A/B)

SPW-KR254GH56(A/B)

T Ceiling-MountedSPW-TDR184GH56(A/B)

SPW-TDR254GH56(A/B)

SPW-TDR364GH56(A/B)

SPW-TDR484GH56(A/B)

T185H T255H T365H T485H

SPW-UR184GH56(A/B)

SPW-UR254GH56(A/B)

SPW-UR364GH56(A/B)

SPW-UR484GH56(A/B)

U185H U255H U365H U485HUR184SH56BU185SHT U255SHT U365SHT U485SHT

UR254SH56B UR364SH56B UR484SH56B

70 90

Class 70 90

Heat Pump Unit(3-phase)

SPW-C706VH8

SPW-C906VH8

Concealed-Duct

Concealed-Duct

SPW-D705H

SPW-D905H

Concealed-DuctHigh-Static Pressure

U

D

C

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed

Wall-Mounted

Ceiling-Mounted

Concealed-Duct

Concealed-DuctHigh-Static Pressure SPW-C706VH8, SPW-C906VH8

SM830161_Book.indb 1SM830161_Book.indb 1 2008/05/19 20:32:512008/05/19 20:32:51

<


Combination of Indoor and Outdoor Units

18 25 36 48 70 90

X

T

U

XM

US

D

K

SPW-XDR184GH56(A/B)x4/ SPW-XDR254GH56(A/B)x3/ SPW-XDR364GH56(A/B)x2/ SPW-XDR484GH56(A/B)x2/SPW-C706VH8 P2 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C906VH8

SPW-X185Hx4/ SPW-X255Hx3/ SPW-X365Hx2/ SPW-X485Hx2/SPW-C706VH8 P3

P4

P5

P8

P9

P10

P11SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C906VH8

SPW-XDR254GH56(A/B)x4/SPW-C906VH8

SPW-X255Hx4/SPW-C906VH8

P6

P7

SPW-XM185Hx4/SPW-C706VH8 P12

SPW-KR184GH56(A/B)x4/ SPW-KR254GH56(A/B)x3/SPW-C706VH8 P13 SPW-C706VH8

SPW-KR254GH56(A/B)x4/SPW-C906VH8

P14

P15

SPW-TDR184GH56(A/B)x4/ SPW-TDR254GH56(A/B)x3/ SPW-TDR364GH56(A/B)x2/ SPW-TDR484GH56(A/B)x2/

SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C906VH8

SPW-T185Hx4/ SPW-T255Hx3/ SPW-T365Hx2/ SPW-T485Hx2/

SPW-C706VH8

P16

P17 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8

P22

P23 SPW-C906VH8

P24

P25

SPW-TDR254GH56(A/B)x4/

SPW-C906VH8

SPW-T255Hx4/

SPW-C906VH8

P18

P19

P20

P21

SPW-UR184GH56(A/B)x4/ SPW-UR254GH56(A/B)x3/ SPW-UR364GH56(A/B)x2 SPW-UR484GH56(A/B)x2/SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C906VH8

SPW-U185Hx4/ SPW-U255Hx3/ SPW-U365Hx2/ SPW-U485Hx2/SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C906VH8

SPW-UR184SH56Bx4/ SPW-UR254SH56Bx3/ SPW-U364SH56Bx2/ SPW-U484SH56Bx2/SPW-C706VH8

SPW-U185SHTx4/SPW-C706VH8

P26

P27

P28

P29

SPW-C706VH8


SPW-C706VH8


P38

P39

P40

P41

P42

P43

P44

P45

SPW-C906VH8


SPW-UR254GH56(A/B)x4/SPW-C906VH8

SPW-U255Hx4/SPW-C906VH8

SPW-UR254SH56Bx4/SPW-C906VH8


P30

P31

P32

P33

P34

P35

P36

P37

SPW-US185Hx4/SPW-C706VH8 P46

SPW-D705H SPW-D905HSPW-C706VH8 SPW-C906VH8P47 P48


—— CONTENTS ——

Section 1. SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 1-11-1. Unit Specifications ........................................................................................................... 1-21-2. Major Component Specifications..................................................................................... 1-491-3. Other Component Specifications..................................................................................... 1-691-4. Dimensional Data ............................................................................................................ 1-771-5. Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................................................ 1-921-6. Operating Range .............................................................................................................. 1-921-7. Capacity Correction Graph According to Temperature Condition.................................... 1-931-8. Noise Criterion Curves..................................................................................................... 1-941-9. Indoor Fan Performance.................................................................................................. 1-1021-10. Airflow Distance Chart ..................................................................................................... 1-1041-11. Intaking Fresh Air of Semi-Concealed Type and Concealed-Duct Type ......................... 1-1131-12. Installation Instructions .................................................................................................... 1-115

Section 2. TEST RUN ........................................................................................................ 2-12-1. Preparing for Test Run ................................................................................................... 2-2

X, XM, T, U, US, D Types ................................................................................................ 2-3K Type ............................................................................................................................. 2-9X, T, U, D Types (for Link Wiring) .................................................................................... 2-16K Type (for Link Wiring) .................................................................................................. 2-21

Section 3. ELECTRICAL DATA ......................................................................................... 3-13-1. Indoor Units (Electric Wiring Diagram, Schematic Diagram)........................................... 3-23-2. Outdoor Units (Electric Wiring Diagram, Schematic Diagram) ........................................ 3-23

Section 4. PROCESS AND FUNCTIONS .......................................................................... 4-14-1. Control Functions............................................................................................................. 4-24-2. Outdoor Unit Control PCB .............................................................................................. 4-84-3. Indoor Unit Control PCB Switches and Functions ........................................................... 4-11

Section 5. SERVICE PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 5-15-1. Meaning of Alarm Messages ........................................................................................... 5-25-2. Contents of LED Display on the Outdoor Unit Control PCB ............................................ 5-45-3. Symptoms and Parts to Inspect ...................................................................................... 5-55-4. Details of Alarm Messages .............................................................................................. 5-85-5. Table of Thermistor Characteristics ................................................................................. 5-145-6. How to Remove the Compressor .................................................................................... 5-155-7. How to Remove the Electrical Component Box .............................................................. 5-16

Section 6. OUTDOOR UNIT MAINTENANCE REMOTE CONTROL................................ 6-16-1. Overview.......................................................................................................................... 6-26-2. Functions ......................................................................................................................... 6-26-3. Normal Display Operations and Functions ...................................................................... 6-36-4. Monitoring Operations: Display of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit Sensor Temperatures..... 6-66-5. Monitoring the Outdoor Unit Alarm History: Display of Outdoor Unit Alarm History ........ 6-76-6. Settings Modes: Setting the Outdoor Unit EEPROM ...................................................... 6-7

Section 7. REMOTE CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS SECTION .......................................... 7-17-1. Simple Settings Function................................................................................................. 7-27-2. List of Simple Setting Items ............................................................................................. 7-37-3. Detailed Settings Function............................................................................................... 7-47-4. List of Detailed Setting Items........................................................................................... 7-5

7-97-5. Simple Setting Items........................................................................................................7-6. Detailed Setting Items ..................................................................................................... 7-127-7. Remote Controller Servicing Functions ........................................................................... 7-167-8. Test Run Function ........................................................................................................... 7-16

Section 8. HOW TO INSTALL THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER RECEIVER.... 8-1

RCS-SH80BG.WL for 4-Way Cassette (X Type) ............................................................ 8-3RCS-TRP80BG.WL for Ceiling Mounted (T Type) .......................................................... 8-6RCS-BH80BG.WL for XM, U and US Types .................................................................. 8-9

Warning ........................................................................................................................... 8-2

Common to All Models .................................................................................................... 8-12

XM Type (for Link Wiring) ............................................................................................... 2-27


1-1

11. SPECIFICATIONS

1-1. Unit Specifications................................................................................................... 1-24-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type ......................................................................................... 1-2Wall-Mounted Type ............................................................................................................................... 1-13Ceiling-Mounted Type ........................................................................................................................... 1-16Concealed-Duct Type ............................................................................................................................ 1-26

1-2. Major Component Specifications ........................................................................... 1-49(A) Indoor Units ..................................................................................................................................... 1-49(B) Outdoor Units .................................................................................................................................. 1-67

1-3. Other Component Specifications ........................................................................... 1-694-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type ......................................................................................... 1-69Wall-Mounted Type ............................................................................................................................... 1-71Ceiling-Mounted Type ........................................................................................................................... 1-72Concealed-Duct Type ............................................................................................................................ 1-73Outdoor Units ........................................................................................................................................ 1-75

1-4. Dimensional Data ..................................................................................................... 1-77(A) Indoor Units ..................................................................................................................................... 1-77 4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type ................................................................................... 1-77 Wall-Mounted Type .......................................................................................................................... 1-80 Ceiling-Mounted Type ...................................................................................................................... 1-81 Concealed-Duct Type ...................................................................................................................... 1-82(B) Outdoor Units .................................................................................................................................. 1-90

1-5. Refrigerant Flow Diagram ....................................................................................... 1-92

1-6. Operating Range ...................................................................................................... 1-92

1-7. Capacity Correction Graph According to Temperature Condition ...................... 1-93

1-8. Noise Criterion Curves ............................................................................................ 1-94

1-9. Indoor Fan Performance .......................................................................................... 1-102

1-10. Airflow Distance Chart ............................................................................................ 1-104

1-11. Intaking Fresh Air of Semi-Concealed Type and Concealed-Duct Type.............. 1-113

1-12. Installation Instructions .......................................................................................... 1-115Tubing Length ....................................................................................................................................... 1-115Optional Distribution Joint Kits .............................................................................................................. 1-119Installing Distribution Joint Kit (for Twin & Double-Twin) ....................................................................... 1-120Installing Distribution Joint Kit (for Triple) .............................................................................................. 1-121SELECTING THE INSTALLATION SITE ............................................................................................... 1-122Dimensions of Air-Discharge Chamber ................................................................................................ 1-125Dimensions of Wind-proof Duct ............................................................................................................ 1-131Dimensions of Snow-proof Duct ........................................................................................................... 1-132HOW TO INSTALL THE OUTDOOR UNIT ........................................................................................... 1-135ELECTRICAL WIRING ......................................................................................................................... 1-136


1-2

1 Simultaneous(Double Twin)-Type

1-1. Unit Specifi cations

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XDR184GH56 (A/B) x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-XDR184GH56 (A/B) x4

Outdoor Unit SPW-C706VH8

POWER SOURCEIndoor Unit 220-230-240V, 50/60Hz, single-phase

Outdoor Unit 380-400-415V, 50/60Hz, 3-phasePERFORMANCE Cooling Heating

Capacity [min~max]kW 20.0 [6.0~22.4] 22.4 [6.0~25.0]

BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 3,840 / 3,360 / 3,120 (960 / 840 / 780 x4)Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 8.8 (2.2 x4) –

ELECTRICAL RATINGSVoltage ratings V 380 400 415 380 400 415Available voltage range V 342~456(outdoor) 198~264(indoor)Running amperes* A 9.9 9.5 9.2 9.6 9.3 9.0Max–Running amperes** A – – – – – –Power input kW 6.08 6.08 6.08 5.93 5.93 5.93C.O.P W / W 3.29 3.29 3.29 3.78 3.78 3.78Max.Starting amperes A – – – – – –

FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) Automatic (Remote control)Air filter Washable, easy access, long life (2,500 hr)Remote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-SH80BG.WLRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) Max.head 64cm above drain connection (25A, OD32mm)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)

Operation soundIndoor - Hi / Me / Lo dB-A 34 / 31 / 28Outdoor - Hi dB-A 57 57

Color(Approximate value)

Indoor Munsell 2.5GY 9.0 / 0.5Outdoor Munsell 1Y 8.5 / 0.5

REFRIGERANT TUBING Indoor unit Outdoor unitLimit of tubing length m (ft.) 100 (328)Limit of tubing length at shipment m (ft.) 5~30(16~98)Limit of elevation differencebetween the two units m (ft.) Outdoor unit is higher than indoor unit: 30 (98)

Outdoor unit is lower than indoor unit: 30 (98)Refrigerant tubeouter diameter

Liquid tube mm (in.) 6.35 (1 / 4) 9.52 (3 / 8)Gas tube mm (in.) 12.7 (1 / 2) 25.4 (1)*1

Refrigerant amount at shipment kg – R410A - 5.3DIMENSIONS & WEIGHT Indoor unit (include panel) Outdoor unit

Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 291 (11-15 / 32) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 950 (37-13 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 950 (37-13 / 32) 340 (13-25 / 64)

Package dimensions

Body Panel Outdoor unitHeight mm (in.) 283 (11-5 / 32) 104 (4-3 / 32) 1676 (65-63 / 64)Width mm (in.) 892 (35-4 / 32) 1008 (39-22 / 32) 1076 (42-23 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 905 (35-20 / 32) 990 (38-31 / 32) 420 (16-17 / 32)

Net weight kg (lb.) 25.5 (56) 118 (260)Shipping weight kg (lb.) 24 (53) 7 (16) 128 (282)Shipping volume m3 (cu.ft) 0.228 (8.1) 0.104 (3.8) 0.757 (26.7)

DATA SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

*1 There are two types of supplied tubings. The one tubing port ø19.05 (fl are process) is connected to the fl ared connection of the gas port side’s service valve. The other “L” shaped tubing port is brazed in connection after cutting the tube at the proper length. Then make a brazing connection to the main tubing (ø25.4).

Cooling:Rating conditions (*): Indoor air temperature 27°C DB/19°C WB, Outdoor air temperature 35°C DBFull load conditions (**): Indoor air temperature 32°C DB/23°C WB, Outdoor air temperature 43°C DB

Heating:Rating conditions (*): Indoor air temperature 20°C DB, Outdoor air temperature 7°C DB/6°C WBFull load conditions (**): Indoor air temperature 24°C DB, Outdoor air temperature 24°C DB/15.5°C WB

NOTENOTE


1-3

1Simultaneous(Double Twin)-Type


4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-X185H x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-X185H x4
















Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-4

1 Simultaneous(Triple)-Type








BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 3,600 / 2,880 / 2,520 (1,200 / 960 / 840 x3)Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 8.4 (2.8 x3) –











Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-5

1Simultaneous(Triple)-Type



















Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-6




















Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-7




















Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-8

1 Simultaneous (Twin)-Type








BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 5,040 / 4,140 / 3,780 (1,680 / 1,380 / 1,260 x2)Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 7.8 (3.9 x2) –











Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-9

1Simultaneous (Twin)-Type



















Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-10

1 Simultaneous (Twin)-Type



















Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-11

1Simultaneous (Twin)-Type



















Package dimensions







NOTENOTE


1-12



4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XM185H x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-XM185H x4







FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) Automatic (Remote control)Air filter Washable, easy access, long life (2,500 hr)Remote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-BH80BG.WLRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) Max.head 64cm above drain connection (OD26mm)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)









Package dimensions


Net weight kg (lb.) 18.4 (40.6) 118 (260)Shipping weight kg (lb.) 19 (41.9) 3.5 (7.7) 128 (282)Shipping volume m3 (cu.ft) 0.13 (4.6) 0.047 (1.7) 0.757 (26.7)





NOTENOTE


1-13



Wall-Mounted Type SPW-KR184GH56 (A/B) x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-KR184GH56 (A/B) x4







FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) Automatic (Remote control)Air filter Washable, easy accessRemote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-SH1BGRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) (13A, OD18mm)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)



Indoor Munsell 3.0Y 8.6 / 0.8Outdoor Munsell 1Y 8.5 / 0.5




Refrigerant amount at shipment kg – R410A - 5.3DIMENSIONS & WEIGHT Indoor unit Outdoor unit

Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 285 (11-7 / 32) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 995 (39-6 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 203 (8) 340 (13-25 / 64)

Package dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 347 (13-21 / 32) 1676 (65-63 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,065 (41-30 / 32) 1076 (42-23 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 260 (10-8 / 32) 420 (16-17 / 32)

Net weight kg (lb.) 12 (27) 118 (260)Shipping weight kg (lb.) 15 (33) 128 (282)Shipping volume m3 (cu.ft) 0.096 (3.4) 0.757 (26.7)

NOTE DATA SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.





1-14



















Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 330 (13) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,140 (44-28 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 228 (8-31 / 32) 340 (13-25 / 64)








1-15



















Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 330 (13) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,140 (44-28 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 228 (8-31 / 32) 340 (13-25 / 64)








1-16



Ceiling-Mounted Type SPW-TDR184GH56 (A/B) x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-TDR184GH56 (A/B) x4







FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) Automatic (Remote control)Air filter Washable, easy access, long life (2,500 hr)Remote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-TRP80BG.WLRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) (20A, OD26mm)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)



Indoor Munsell 10Y 9.3 / 0.4Outdoor Munsell 1Y 8.5 / 0.5


Outdoor unit is lower than indoor unit: 30 (98)

Refrigerant tubeouter diameter




Package dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 280 (11-1 / 32) 1676 (65-63 / 64)Width mm (in.) 985 (38-25 / 32) 1076 (42-23 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 780 (30-23 / 32) 420 (16-17 / 32)







1-17



Ceiling-Mounted Type SPW-T185H x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-T185H x4























1-18



















Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 210 (8-9 / 32) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,180 (46-15 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 680 (26-25 / 32) 340 (13-25 / 64)








1-19



























1-20



























1-21



























1-22

1 Simultaneous(Twin)-Type


























1-23

1Simultaneous(Twin)-Type


























1-24



























1-25



























1-26



Concealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184GH56 (A/B) x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-UR184GH56 (A/B) x4





BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 2,880 / 2,520 / 2,160 (720 / 630 / 540 x4)Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 12.0 (3.0 x4) –External static pressure (High) Pa (mmAg) 40 (4.1): at shipment, 62 (6.3): using the booster cable


FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) –Air filter Field supplyRemote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-BH80BG.WLRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) Max.head 50cm above drain connection (25A, OD32mm)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)

Operation soundIndoor - Hi / Me / Lo dB-A 30 / 28 / 25, (33 / 30 / 28: using the booster cable)Outdoor - Hi dB-A 57 57


Indoor –Outdoor Munsell 1Y 8.5 / 0.5













1-27



Concealed-Duct Type SPW-U185H x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-U185H x4























1-28



Concealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184SH56B x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-UR184SH56B x4























1-29



Concealed-Duct Type SPW-U185SHT x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-U185SHT x4























1-30









BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 3,240 / 2,700 / 2,340 (1,080 / 900 / 780 x3)Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 10.5 (3.5 x3) –External static pressure (High) Pa (mmAg) 50 (5.1): at shipment, 92 (9.4): using the booster cable


















1-31



























1-32



























1-33



























1-34



























1-35



























1-36



























1-37



























1-38









BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 3,600 / 3,120 / 2,520 (1,800 / 1,560 / 1,260 x2)Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 8.4 (4.2 x2) –External static pressure (High) Pa (mmAg) 79 (8.1): at shipment, 122 (12.4): using the booster cable


















1-39



























1-40



















Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 310 (12-7 / 32) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,480 (58-9 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 686 (27) 340 (13-25 / 64)

Package dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 330 (13) 1676 (65-63 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,755 (69-3 / 32) 1076 (42-23 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 778 (30-5 / 8) 420 (16-17 / 32)







1-41



























1-42



























1-43



























1-44



























1-45



























1-46



Concealed-Duct Type SPW-US185H x4 / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-US185H x4





BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 3,000 / 2,760 / 2,400 (750 / 690 / 600 x4)Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 7.2 (1.8 x4) –External static pressure (High) Pa (mmAg) 15 (1.5): at shipment, 40 (4.1): Using short circuit connection


FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) –Air filter Field supplyRemote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-BH80BG.WLRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) Max.head 50cm above drain connection (OD26mm)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)

Operation soundIndoor - Hi / Me / Lo dB-A 35 / 33 / 31, (37 / 35 / 33: Using short circuit connection)Outdoor - Hi dB-A 57 57















1-47

1Single-Type


Concealed-Duct High Static Pressure Type SPW-D705H / SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-D705H





BTU / h 68,200 [20,500~76,400] 76,400 [20,500~85,300]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 3,360 / 3,190 / 2,980Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 11.1 –External static pressure (High) Pa (mmAg) 176 (18)


FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) –Air filter Field supplyRemote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-BH80BG.WLRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) 25A Male screw (No Drain Pump)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)






Liquid tube mm (in.) 9.52 (3 / 8) 9.52 (3 / 8)Gas tube mm (in.) 25.4 (1)*1 25.4 (1)*1


Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 467 (18-12 / 32) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,428 (56-7 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 1,230 (48-14 / 32) 340 (13-25 / 64)

Package dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 614 (24-11 / 64) 1676 (65-63 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,536 (60-15 / 32) 1076 (42-23 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 1,339 (52-23 / 32) 420 (16-17 / 32)







1-48

1 Single-Type


Concealed-Duct High Static Pressure Type SPW-D905H / SPW-C906VH8

MODEL No.Indoor Unit SPW-D905H


POWER SOURCEIndoor Unit 220-230-240V, 50Hz, single-phase



BTU / h 85,300 [20,500~95,500] 95,500 [20,500~107,500]Air circulation (Hi / Me / Lo) m3 / h 4,320 / 4,200 / 3,960Moisture removal (High) Liters / h 13.9 –External static pressure (High) Pa (mmAg) 216 (22): at shipment 235 (24): using the booster cable


FEATURESControls / Thermostat control Microprocessor / I.C.thermostatTimer ON / OFF 72-hoursFan speeds Indoor / Outdoor 3 and Automatic control / VariableAirflow direction (Indoor) –Air filter Field supplyRemote controller (Option) Wired: RCS-TM80BG / Wireless: RCS-BH80BG.WLRefrigerant control –Drain pump (Drain connection) 25A Male screw (No Drain Pump)Compressor Rotary (SANYO)






Liquid tube mm (in.) 12.7 (1 / 2) 12.7 (1 / 2)Gas tube mm (in.) 25.4 (1) 25.4 (1)*1


Unit dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 467 (18-12 / 32) 1526 (60-5 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,428 (56-7 / 32) 940 (37-1 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 1,230 (48-14 / 32) 340 (13-25 / 64)

Package dimensionsHeight mm (in.) 614 (24-11 / 64) 1676 (65-63 / 64)Width mm (in.) 1,536 (60-15 / 32) 1076 (42-23 / 64)Depth mm (in.) 1,339 (52-23 / 32) 420 (16-17 / 32)







1-49

1

1-2. Major Component Specifi cations

(A) Indoor Units4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XDR184GH56 (A/B), X185H

MODEL No. SPW-XDR184GH56 (A/B), X185H

Source 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50/60Hz

Controller P.C.B. Ass'y CR-SXRP56B-B (Microprocessor)

Fan (Number...diameter, depth) Turbo (1...ø460, L140)

Fan motorModel...Nominal output W DK8-53B280H...50WSource 280/340V (DC), 3-phaseNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 8P...390

Coil resistance(Ambient temperature 20°C)

ΩRED–WHT : 87.0WHT–BLK : 87.0BLK–RED : 87.0

Run capacitor VAC, µF –Safety device overcurrent, rotating signal detection, fuse

Electronic expansion valveCoil –Coil resistance (at 20°C) Ω –Valve body –

Heat ExchangerCoil Aluminium plate fin / Copper tubeRows...fin pitch mm 2...1.25Face area m2 0.36

Panel Indoor unitModel No. PNR-XD484GHAB (optional)Dew proof heater –Auto louver motor MP24GACoil resistance (at 20°C) Ω 380 ± 7% / phase

Drain Pump ADP-1414Rated VAC, W AC230V, 50Hz, 12WTotal head & capacity 500mm, 400cc/min


1-50

1







Fan motorModel...Nominal output W DK8-53B280H...50WSource 280/340V (DC), 3-phaseNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 8P...440









1-51

1






Fan (Number...diameter, depth) Turbo (1...ø460, 200)

Fan motorModel...Nominal output W DK8-93C280H...90WSource 280/340V (DC), 3-phaseNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 8P...540









1-52

1






Fan (Number...diameter, depth) Turbo (1...ø460, 200)










1-53

1


(A) Indoor Units4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XM185H

MODEL No. SPW-XM185H


Controller P.C.B. Ass'y CR-XM075XH (Microprocessor), POW-XM075XH


Fan motorModel...Nominal output W SIC-72FV-D866-1...66WSource 280/340V (DC), 3-phaseNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 8P...750Coil resistance

(Ambient temperature 20°C)Ω –




Panel Indoor unitModel No. PNR-XM185 (optional)Dew proof heater –Auto louver motor MP24ZN-12VCoil resistance (at 20°C) Ω 380 ± 7% / phase

Drain Pump PLD-12230ST-2Rated VAC, W AC230V, 50Hz, 12WTotal head & capacity 850mm, 400cc/min


1-54

1


(A) Indoor UnitsWall-Mounted Type SPW-KR184GH56 (A/B)

MODEL No. SPW-KR184GH56 (A/B)


Controller P.C.B. Ass'y POW-KR74GXH56 (Microprocessor)

Fan (Number...diameter, depth) Cross - flow (1...ø90, L746)

Fan motorModel...Nominal output W UF4Q-31G5P...12WSource 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50/60HzNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 4P...1,147


ΩBRN–WHT : 490.5 ORG–YEL : 39.18WHT–VLT : 78.43 YEL–PNK : 213.5VLT–ORG : 62.63

Safety deviceOperation temperature(17AM033E5-4)

Open °C 130 ± 5Close °C 83 ± 15

Operation temperature(9700k211-215)

Open °C 130 ± 8Close °C 79 ± 15

Run capacitor VAC, µF 440 VAC, 1.2 µFElectronic expansion valve

Coil –Coil resistance (at 20°C) Ω –Valve body –


PanelModel No. –Dew proof heater –Auto louver motor –Coil resistance (at 20°C) Ω –

Drain PumpRated VAC, W –Total head & capacity –


1-55

1


(A) Indoor UnitsWall-Mounted Type SPW-KR254GH56 (A/B)

MODEL No. SPW-KR254GH56 (A/B)


Controller P.C.B. Ass'y POW-KR74GXH56 (Microprocessor)

Fan (Number...diameter, depth) Cross - flow (1...ø100, L848)

Fan motorModel...Nominal output W KFT4Q-31A5P-C...27WSource 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50/60HzNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 4P...1,147


ΩBRN–WHT : 307.5 ORG–YEL : 23.4WHT–VLT : 54.6 YEL–PNK : 97.8VLT–ORG : 34.5

Safety deviceOperation temperature(17AM033E5-4)

Open °C 130 ± 5Close °C 83 ± 15

Operation temperature(9700k211-215)

Open °C 130 ± 8Close °C 79 ± 15







1-56

1


(A) Indoor UnitsCeiling-Mounted Type SPW-TDR184GH56 (A/B), T185H

MODEL No. SPW-TDR184GH56 (A/B), T185H



Fan (Number...diameter, depth) Centrifugal (2...ø140, L180)










1-57

1







Fan motorModel...Nominal output W DK8-63D280H...40WSource 280/340V (DC), 3-phaseNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 8P...980









1-58

1
















1-59

1
















1-60

1


(A) Indoor UnitsConcealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184GH56 (A/B), UR184SH56B, U185H

MODEL No.SPW-UR184GH56 (A/B)SPW-U185H

SPW-UR184SH56BSPW-U185SHT


Controller P.C.B. Ass'y CR-UXRP71B-B (Microprocessor)


Fan motorModel...Nominal output W SFG4X-51C3P...50WSource 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50/60HzNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 4P...1,191


ΩBRN–WHT : 76.88 ORG–YEL : 14.42WHT–VLT : 12.66 YEL–BLK : 26.76VLT–ORG : 21.01 BLK–PNK : 25.17

Safety deviceOperation temperature Open °C 130 ± 5Operation temperature Close °C (115 ± 5)





Drain Pump ADP-1413 ZPLD-12230ST-XH-BRated VAC, W AC 230V, 50Hz, 12WTotal head & capacity 500mm, 400cc/min 1200mm, 400cc/min


1-61

1



MODEL No.SPW-UR254GH56(A/B)

SPW-UR254SH56BU255SHT

SPW-U255H




Fan motorModel...Nominal output W SFG4X-71C3P...70W KFG4X-71B5P-S...70WSource 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50/60HzNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 4P...1,063








Drain Pump ADP-1413 ZPLD-12230ST-XH-B ADP-1413Rated VAC, W AC 230V, 50Hz, 12WTotal head & capacity 500mm, 400cc/min 1200mm, 400cc/min 500mm, 400cc/min


1-62

1



MODEL No.SPW-UR364GH56 (A/B)


SPW-U365H




Fan motorModel...Nominal output W SFC4X-141A5P...160W KFC4X-141D5PS...160WSource 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50/60HzNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 4P...1,111










1-63

1



MODEL No.SPW-UR484GH56 (A/B)


SPW-U485H




Fan motorModel...Nominal output W SFC4X-141A5P...160W KFC4X-141D5P-S...160WSource 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50/60HzNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 4P...1,207


ΩBRN–WHT : 25.79 ORG–YEL : 5.792

WHT–VLT : 5.086 YEL–BLK : 6.746VLT–ORG : 8.626 BLK–PNK : 6.361








1-64

1


(A) Indoor UnitsConcealed-Duct Type SPW-US185H

MODEL No. SPW-US185H


Controller P.C.B. Ass'y CR-US075XH (Microprocessor)


Fan motorModel...Nominal output W DK8-63G280H...60WSource 280 / 340V (DC), 3-phase, 50/60HzNo. of pole...rpm (230V, High) rpm 8P...834Coil resistance(Ambient temperature 20°C)

Ω –

Run capacitor VAC, µF –Electronic expansion valve




Drain Pump PLD-12230ST-2Rated VAC, W AC 230V, 50Hz, 12WTotal head & capacity 850mm, 400cc/min


1-65

1


(A) Indoor UnitsConcealed-Duct High Static Pressure Type

MODEL No. SPW-D705H



Fan (Number...diameter) mm Centrifugal (2...ø220)

Fan motorModel...Nominal output W KFC4X-201B5P...180 W

Power source 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50Hz

No. of pole...r.p.m. (230V, High) rpm 4P... 1,012


ΩBRN – WHT : 13.75 ORG – YEL : 2.21

WHT – VLT : 4.47 YEL – BLK : 10.33

VLT – ORG : 1.20 BLK – PNK : 12.90

Safety device

Operating temperatureOpen °C 130 ± 5

Close °C (115 ± 5)

Run capacitor VAC, µF 450 VAC, 7.0 µF

Electronic expansion valveCoil –

Coil resistance (at 20°C) Ω –

Valve body –

Heat exchangerCoil Aluminium plate fin / Copper tube

Rows...fin pitch mm 3...2.0

Face area m2 0.540


1-66

1


(A) Indoor UnitsConcealed-Duct High Static Pressure Type

MODEL No. SPW-D905H

Source 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50Hz


Fan (Number...diameter) mm Centrifugal (2...ø250)

Fan motorModel...Nominal output W KFC4X-401B3P...400 W

Power source 220 - 230 - 240V, single-phase, 50Hz

No. of pole...r.p.m. (230V, High) rpm 4P... 1,211


ΩBRN – WHT : 6,159 ORG – YEL : 0.87

WHT – VLT : 1.08 YEL – BLK : 2.87

VLT – ORG : 0.77 BLK – PNK : 5.98

Safety device

Operating temperatureOpen °C 130 ± 5

Close °C (115 ± 5)

Run capacitor VAC, µF 450 VAC, 5.0 µF

Electronic expansion valveCoil –

Coil resistance (at 20°C) Ω –

Valve body –

Heat exchangerCoil Aluminium plate fin / Copper tube

Rows...fin pitch mm 3...2.0

Face area m2 0.655


1-67

1


(B) Outdoor UnitsSPW-C706VH8

MODEL No. SPW-C706VH8

Source 380-400-415V, 3-phase, 50/60Hz

Controller P.C.B. Ass'y CR-C906VH8 (Microprocessor)Control circuit fuse 20A

CompressorModel....number C-9RVN273H0KSource 246V (DC) / 3-phase / 60Hz (Inverter drive)Nominal output W 4,200Compressor oil cc 1,400Coil resistance(Ambient temperatur e 25°C) Ω C – R : 0.552 R – S : 0.552

C – S : 0.552Safety control

Overload relay models Discharge temperature control

Operation temperatureOpen °C –Close °C –

Crank case heater W 25Refrigerant amount at shipment kg R410A - 5.3

High pressure switch

Set pressureOFF MPa 4.15 0

– 0.15

ON MPa 3.15 ± 0.3Fan

Number...diameter mm 2...ø490Air circulation m3 / h 7,740

Fan speeds (Max.) ~860 rpm (Inverter drive control)

Fan motorModel No. SIC-71FW-D8120Source ~280V / 3-phaseNo. of pole 8Nominal output W 120Safety device –

Operating temperatureOpen °C –Close °C –

Run capacitor VAC, µF –Heat exchanger

Coil Aluminium plate fin / Copper tubeRows...fin pitch mm 2...1.4Face area m2 1.27


1-68

1


(B) Outdoor UnitsSPW-C906VH8

MODEL No. SPW-C906VH8

Source 380-400-415V, 3-phase, 50/60Hz

Controller P.C.B. Ass'y CR-C906VH8 (Microprocessor)Control circuit fuse 20A

CompressorModel....number C-9RVN393H0USource 282V (DC) / 3-phase / 60Hz (Inverter drive)Nominal output W 5,500Compressor oil cc 1,900Coil resistance(Ambient temperature 25°C) Ω C – R : 0.608 R – S : 0.608

C – S : 0.608Safety control

Overload relay models Discharge temperature control

Operation temperatureOpen °C –Close °C –

Crank case heater W 25Refrigerant amount at shipment kg R410A - 6.5

High pressure switch

Set pressureOFF MPa 4.15 0

– 0.15

ON MPa 3.15 ± 0.3Fan

Number...diameter mm 2...ø490Air circulation m3 / h 7,080

Fan speeds (Max.) ~860 rpm (Inverter drive control)

Fan motorModel No. SIC-71FW-D8120Source ~280V / 3-phaseNo. of pole 8Nominal output W 120Safety device –

Operating temperatureOpen °C –Close °C –

Run capacitor VAC, µF –Heat exchanger

Coil Aluminium plate fin / Copper tubeRows...fin pitch mm 3...1.4Face area m2 1.27


1-69

1

1-3. Other Component Specifi cations

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XDR184-484GH56 (A/B), X185-485H

MODEL No. Indoor UnitSPW-XDR184-484GH56 (A/B)SPW-X185-485H

Power Transformer –Rated –

Source VAC, Hz –

Secondary––

Coil resistance Ω –Thermal cut off temperature °C –

Thermistor (Coil sensor): TH PB2M-41E-S3, PB3M-41E-AS1Resistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%

Thermistor (Coil sensor): KTEC-35-S98Resistance kΩ 0°C: 16.5±5% 40°C: 2.7±5%

5°C: 12.8±5% 45°C: 2.2±5% 10°C: 10.0±5% 50°C: 1.8±5% 20°C: 6.3±5% 55°C: 1.5±5% 30°C: 4.0±5%

Electronic expansion valveValve body –Coil –

Drain pump ADP-1414Rated AC 230V, 12 W

Float switch FS-0218-102Rated (Contact rated) Contact open at float rising


1-70

1


4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XM185H

MODEL No. Indoor Unit SPW-XM185H


Source VAC, Hz –

Secondary––


Thermistor (Coil sensor): TH PB2M-41E-S15-1Resistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%


5°C: 12.8±5% 45°C: 2.2±5% 10°C: 10.0±5% 50°C: 1.8±5% 20°C: 6.3±5% 55°C: 1.5±5% 30°C: 4.0±5%


Drain pump PLD-12230ST-2Rated AC 230V, 12W



1-71

1


Wall-Mounted Type SPW-KR184GH56 (A/B) – 254GH56 (A/B)

MODEL No. Indoor Unit SPW-KR184GH56 (A/B) – 254GH56 (A/B)

Power Transformer ATR-IIK245Rated

Source VAC, Hz AC 230 V , 50/60 Hz

SecondaryS1: 11 V, 1.25 A S2: 14 V, 0.45 AS3: 20 V, 0.2 A

Coil resistance ΩThermal cut off temperature °C 150°C

Thermistor (Coil sensor): TH PBC-41E-AS7-1, PBC-41E-AS7-3Resistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%

Thermistor (Coil sensor): KTEC-35-SResistance kΩ 0°C: 16.5±5% 40°C: 2.7±5%

5°C: 12.8±5% 45°C: 2.2±5% 10°C: 10.0±5% 50°C: 1.8±5% 20°C: 6.3±5% 55°C: 1.5±5% 30°C: 4.0±5%


Drain pump –Rated –

Float switch –Rated (Contact rated) –


1-72

1


Ceiling-Mounted Type SPW-TDR184-484GH56 (A/B), T185-485H

MODEL No. Indoor UnitSPW-TDR184-484GH56 (A/B)SPW-T185-485H


Source VAC, Hz –

Secondary––


Thermistor (Coil sensor): TH PBC-41E-AS4, PBC-41E-AS8-5Resistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%


5°C: 12.8±5% 45°C: 2.2±5% 10°C: 10.0±5% 50°C: 1.8±5% 20°C: 6.3±5% 55°C: 1.5±5% 30°C: 4.0±5%


Drain pump –Rated –

Float switch –Rated (Contact rated) –


1-73

1


Concealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184-484GH56 (A/B), UR184-484SH56B, U185-485H, U185-485SHT

MODEL No. Indoor UnitSPW-UR184-484GH56 (A/B)SPW-U185-485H

SPW-UR184-484SH56BSPW-U185-485SHT

Power Transformer ATR-IL225B-T-RRated

Source VAC, Hz AC 230 V, 50 Hz

SecondaryS1: DC 13.0 V, 1 AS2: DC 24.0 V, 0.2 A

Coil resistance ΩThermal cut off temperature °C

Thermistor (Coil sensor): TH PBC-41E-S36, PBC-41E-AS8-1,2Resistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%


5°C: 12.8±5% 45°C: 2.2±5% 10°C: 10.0±5% 50°C: 1.8±5% 20°C: 6.3±5% 55°C: 1.5±5% 30°C: 4.0±5%


Drain pump ADP-1413 ZPLD-12230ST-XH-BRated AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 12/11 W



1-74

1


Concealed-Duct Type SPW-US185H

MODEL No. Indoor Unit SPW-US185H


Source VAC, Hz –

Secondary––


Thermistor (Coil sensor): TH PB2M-41E-SI5-1 E1,E2Resistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%


5°C: 12.8±5% 45°C: 2.2±5% 10°C: 10.0±5% 50°C: 1.8±5% 20°C: 6.3±5% 55°C: 1.5±5% 30°C: 4.0±5%


Drain pump PLD-12230ST-2Rated AC 230V, 12W



1-75

1


Outdoor Units SPW-C706VH8

MODEL No. Outdoor Unit SPW-C706VH8


Source VAC, Hz –

Secondary––


Thermistor (Coil / Air sensor): TH1, TH2, TH3, TH4 KTM-35D-S1, DTN-C532G3HResistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%

Thermistor (Discharge gas sensor): TH5 CM-12Resistance kΩ 60°C: 12.4±5% 90°C: 4.6±5%

70°C: 8.7±5% 100°C: 3.4±7% 75°C: 7.4±5% 110°C: 2.5±7% 80°C: 6.3±5% 120°C: 1.9±7% 85°C: 5.3±5% 130°C: 1.5±7%

Relay (Comp. Magnetic Contactor)Coil rated VAC –Contact rating VAC, A –Coil resistance (at 20°C) Ω –

Sol-Control-ValveSol-control-valve UKV-25D18Magnetic coil UKV-A053 (062), DC 12 V

4 way valve4 way valve STF-0401GElectro magnetic coil STF-01AI518A1, AC 220-240 V, 50Hz / 60Hz


1-76

1


Outdoor Units SPW-C906VH8

MODEL No. Outdoor Unit SPW-C906VH8


Source VAC, Hz –

Secondary––


Thermistor (Coil / Air sensor): TH1, TH2, TH3, TH4 KTM-35D-S1, DTN-C532G3HResistance kΩ –10°C: 23.7±5% 20°C: 6.5±5%

–5°C: 18.8±5% 30°C: 4.4±5% 0°C: 15.0±5% 40°C: 3.1±5% 5°C: 12.1±5% 45°C: 2.6±5% 10°C: 9.7±5% 50°C: 2.1±5%

Thermistor (Discharge gas sensor): TH5 CM-12Resistance kΩ 60°C: 12.4±5% 90°C: 4.6±5%

70°C: 8.7±5% 100°C: 3.4±7% 75°C: 7.4±5% 110°C: 2.5±7% 80°C: 6.3±5% 120°C: 1.9±7% 85°C: 5.3±5% 130°C: 1.5±7%

Relay (Comp. Magnetic Contactor)Coil rated VAC –Contact rating VAC, A –Coil resistance (at 20°C) Ω –

Sol-Control-ValveSol-control-valve UKV-25D18Magnetic coil UKV-U030E, DC 12 V

4 way valve4 way valve STF-0712GElectro magnetic coil STF-01AI518A1, AC 220-240 V, 50Hz / 60Hz


1

1-77

1-4. Dimensional Data

(A) Indoor Units: 4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed (X) Type

18, 25 Types

256

120

480

480

400

60

250

70

73

30

15

30

160

8016

0

160

347

45

113

514

514

88

88

382

3584

084

0

950

950

X

790

188

97

860

– 91

0

120

210

97

723

860 – 910

Air

inta

ke

Dis

char

ge o

utle

t

Ref

riger

ant t

ubin

g (li

quid

tube

) 18

type

ø6.

35 (

flare

d), 2

5 ty

pe ø

9.52

(fla

red)

Ref

riger

ant t

ubin

g (g

as tu

be)

18 ty

pe ø

12.7

(fla

red)

, 25

type

ø15

.88

(fla

red)

Dra

in tu

be c

onne

ctio

n po

rt V

P25

(ou

ter

dia.

ø32

)

Pow

er s

uppl

y po

rt

Dis

char

ge d

uct c

onne

ctio

n po

rt (

ø15

0)

Vap

oriz

atio

n-ty

pe h

umid

ifier

(op

tiona

l) in

stal

latio

n po

int

Sus

pens

ion

bolt

hole

(4-

12 ×

37

hole

)

Fres

h ai

r in

take

duc

t con

nect

ion

port

(ø

100)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

* T

he le

ngth

of t

he s

uspe

nsio

n bo

lts s

houl

d be

sel

ecte

d so

that

th

ere

is a

gap

of 3

0 m

m o

r m

ore

belo

w th

e lo

wer

sur

face

of

the

ceili

ng (

15 m

m o

r m

ore

belo

w th

e lo

wer

sur

face

of t

he

mai

n un

it), a

s sh

own

in th

e fig

ure

at r

ight

. If t

he s

uspe

nsio

n bo

lt is

too

long

, it w

ill c

onta

ct

the

ceili

ng p

anel

and

the

unit

cann

ot b

e in

stal

led.

Ceiling opening dimensions

Suspension bolt pitch

Cei

ling

open

ing

dim

ensi

ons

Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h

Cen

ter

of

pane

l

Less

than

35

Less

than

35

X V

iew

9

53

7

2 2 1 2

10

87

8

2

4

6


1

1-78


(A) Indoor Units: 4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed (X) Type

36, 48 Types

160

319

97

97

480

480

(400)

60

250

70

188

73

30

15

30

160

8016

0

210

347

45

113

514

514

88

88

382

35

950

950

X

183

860 – 910

723

840

183

860

– 91

0

790

840

* T

he le

ngth

of t

he s

uspe

nsio

n bo

lts s

houl

d be

sel

ecte

d so

that

th

ere

is a

gap

of 3

0 m

m o

r m

ore

belo

w th

e lo

wer

sur

face

of

the

ceili

ng (

15 m

m o

r m

ore

belo

w th

e lo

wer

sur

face

of t

he

mai

n un

it), a

s sh

own

in th

e fig

ure

at r

ight

. If t

he s

uspe

nsio

n bo

lt is

too

long

, it w

ill c

onta

ct

the

ceili

ng p

anel

and

the

unit

cann

ot b

e in

stal

led.

Less

than

35

Less

than

35

Cei

ling

open

ing

dim

ensi

ons

Ceiling opening dimensions

Susp

ensio

n bo

lt pitc

h

X v

iew

Suspension bolt pitch

Cen

ter

of p

anel

Air

inta

ke

Dis

char

ge o

utle

t

Ref

riger

ant t

ubin

g (li

quid

tube

) ø

9.52

(fla

red)

Ref

riger

ant t

ubin

g (g

as tu

be)

ø15

.88

(fla

red)

Dra

in tu

be c

onne

ctio

n po

rt V

P25

(ou

ter

dia.

ø32

)

Pow

er s

uppl

y po

rt

Dis

char

ge d

uct c

onne

ctio

n po

rt (

ø15

0)

Vap

oriz

atio

n-ty

pe h

umid

ifier

(op

tiona

l) in

stal

latio

n po

int

Sus

pens

ion

bolt

hole

(4-

12 ×

37

hole

)

Fres

h ai

r in

take

duc

t con

nect

ion

port

(ø

100)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

53

4

9

76

22 2 1 2

8

10

87


1

1-79


(A) Indoor Units: 4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed (XM) Type

18 Type

160

45

170

30

11745

53

215

575

283

36

5

Less

than

25

Less

than

25

92

575

327

534

Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h

534 Suspension bolts pitch

316

600

Cei

ling

open

ing

dim

ensi

ons

600Ceiling opening dimensions

7C

ente

r of

pane

l

625

625

334

358

122

2

2

195

125

A V

iew

8

30

1779

The

leng

th o

f the

sus

pens

ion

bolts

sho

uld

be s

elec

ted

so th

atth

ere

is a

gap

of 3

0 m

m o

r th

e ce

iling

(17

mm

or

mor

ebe

low

the

low

er s

urfa

ce o

f the

m

ain

unit)

, as

show

n in

the

figur

e at

rig

ht. I

f the

sus

pens

ion

bolts

is to

o lo

ng, i

t will

con

tact

th

e ce

iling

pan

el a

nd th

e un

it ca

nnot

be

inst

alle

d.

AA

Air

inta

ke

Dis

char

ge o

utle

t

Ref

riger

ant t

ubin

g (li

quid

tube

) 18

type

o6.

35 (

flare

d)

Ref

riger

ant t

ubin

g (g

as tu

be)

18 ty

pe o

12.7

(fla

red)

Dra

in tu

be c

onne

ctio

n po

rt V

P20

(ou

ter

dia.

o26

)

Pow

er s

uppl

y po

rt

Sus

pens

ion

bolt

hole

(4-

12 x

30

hole

)

Fre

sh a

ir in

take

duc

t con

nect

ion

port

(ø

100)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


1

1-80

99528

5

Drain hose VP13 (length: Approx. 450 mm)

Drain hose VP13 (length: Approx. 450 mm)

LIquid tube ø6.35 (length: Approx. 470 mm)

Liquid tube ø9.52 (length: Approx. 570 mm)

Drain and wiring port (ø9.52)

Drain and wiring port (ø9.52)Gas tube ø12.7 (length: Approx. 400 mm)

Gas tube ø15.88 (length: Approx. 500 mm)

7, 9, 12, 18 type

25 type

1,140

330

ø80ø80


(A) Indoor Units: Wall-Mounted Type

18 Type

25 Type


1

1-81


(A) Indoor Units: Ceiling-Mounted Type

18

25

36, 48

855

1125

1540

910

1180

1595

210

210

210

A B CLength

TypeB C

A17

032

0

680

27.5 27.5

Ceiling side

(Suspension bolt pitch)

(Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h)

Air intake

Air

251 84 146 161

75 97 216

39 39

171 10

5

171

251

Gas tubing

Liquid tubing

Right sideLeft sideRear (Figure shows view from front)

Closed with rubber stopper at time of shipment.

Left drain position Right drain position

(Liquid tubing • Gas tubing)

Unit: mm


1

1-82

Refrigerant liquid line ø6.35 (liquid tube)Refrigerant gas line ø12.7Upper drain port (O.D. 32 mm)Bottom drain port (O.D. 32 mm)Suspension lugPower supply outlet (2-ø30)Fresh air intake port (ø150)Flange for the flexible air outlet duct (ø200)Tube cover Electrical component boxFlange for the air intake duct(Option or field supply)

9

10

10

11

11

780

(Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h)


12-ø

3.3

(Hol

e)

662

(Air

outle

t duc

t fla

nge)

(150

)

4070

0

200

P ×

3 =

600

290

262

75 65

285

7013

0

2521

0

310

25 175 35

9020

0

3131

24

185

580 25

115

190

85

25

7030

160

6302510

260(Air outlet

duct flange)

19

Insp

ectio

n ac

cess

(450

× 45

0)(F

ield

sup

ply)


(A) Indoor Unit: Concealed-Duct (U) Type

18 Type SPW-UR184GH56 (A/B), U185H


1

1-83

Indoor unit: 25 Type

Refrigerant liquid line ø9.52 (liquid tube)(Use the tube connector)Refrigerant gas line ø15.88 (gas tube)Upper drain port (O.D. 32 mm)Bottom drain port (O.D. 32 mm)Suspension lugPower supply outlet (2-ø30)Fresh air intake port (ø150)Flange for the flexible air outlet duct (ø200)Tube cover Electrical component boxFlange for the air intake duct(Option or field supply)

9

10

11


16-ø

3.3

(Hol

e)

962

(A

ir ou

tlet d

uct f

lang

e)

900

1000

1080

(S

uspe

nsio

n bo

lt pi

tch)

(150

)

40

290

290

272

75 65

9018

0

3131

185

580 25

115

19

Insp

ectio

n ac

cess

(450

× 4

50)

(Fie

ld s

uppl

y)

285

7013

0

2521

0

310

25 175 35

190

85

25

7030

160

6302510

11 24260(Air outlet

duct flange)

10



SPW-UR254GH56 (A/B), U255H


1

1-84

Indoor unit: 36, 48 Type

Refrigerant liquid line ø9.52 (liquid tube)Refrigerant gas line ø15.88 (gas tube)Upper drain port (O.D. 32 mm)Bottom drain port (O.D. 32 mm)Suspension lugPower supply outlet (2-ø30)Fresh air intake port (ø150)Flange for the flexible air outlet duct (ø200)Tube cover Electrical component boxFlange for the air intake duct(Option or field supply)

9

10

11


18-ø

3.3

(Hol

e)

1442

(A

ir ou

tlet d

uct f

lang

e)

230

P ×

6 =

138

0

1480

1560

(S

uspe

nsio

n bo

lt pi

tch)

(150

)

40

335

335

335

310

75 65

9023

0

3131

185

580 25

115

19

Insp

ectio

n ac

cess

(450

× 4

50)

(Fie

ld s

uppl

y)

285

7013

0

2521

0

310

25 175 35

190

85

25

7030

160

6302510

24260(Air outlet

duct flange)

11

10



SPW-UR364GH56 (A/B), U365H SPW-UR484GH56 (A/B), U485H


1

1-85



SPW-UR184SH56B SPW-U185SHT

18-Ø3.1(Hole)

12-Ø3.3

780

(Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h)

Out

let d

uct s

ide

Inta

ke p

ort s

ide

700

40

580(Suspension bolt pitch)

25 5

(150

)

100P

X5=

500

7373

100P

X3=

300

9696

646

(Fla

nge

O.D

.)

(Flange O.D.)49

2 (F

lang

e O

.D.)

161

7527

100

13

24

12262

190Inspection access panel

Ceiling

(Hole)

30

175

310

160 2570

630

285

70

35

130

213

11 10 9 4

25

100P

X2=

200

262

3131

31

8

(Fla

nge

O.D

.)

185

90

7

100

4343

186

6

14

65

115

186

Refrigerant tubing joint Ø6.35Flare (liquid tube) Refrigerant tubing joint Ø12.7Flare (gas tube) Upper drain port VP25 (O.D. 32 mm) 200 flexible hose suppliedBottom drain port VP25 (O.D. 32 mm)Suspension lug (4 - 12 x 37 mm)Power supply outlet (2 - Ø30 mm)Fresh air intake port (Ø150 mm)Flange for flexible air outlet ductTube coverElectrical component boxWind pressure enduranceFlange for air intake ductFilter (608x241) x1Flange for air outlet duct

1

2

3

4567891011121314

Inspection access(450 x 450)

(Field supply)


1

1-86



SPW-UR254SH56B SPW-U255SHT

20 -Ø3.3(Hole)

1000

1080

(Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h)

580

(Fla

nge

O.D

.)

25

40

5

(150

)

100P

X9=

900

2323

100P

X7=

700

4141

946

(F

lang

e O

.D.)

26 -Ø3.1(Hole)

782

(Fla

nge

O.D

.)17

1

75

27

100

13

(Flange O.D.)

2412

262

190

130

35

70 285

630

70 25160

175

310

30 213


(Field supply)

11 10 9 4

25

100P

X2=

200

3131

262

31

8185

90

7

100

4343

186

Out

let d

uct s

ide

14

1156

65

186

Inspection access panel

CeilingIn

take

por

t sid

e



1

2

3

4567891011121314


1

1-87



SPW-UR364SH56B, U365SHT SPW-UR484SH56B, U485SHT

1480

1560

(S

uspe

nsio

n bo

lt pi

tch)

40

25580

Inta

ke p

ort s

ide

5

(150

)

1426

(F

lang

e O

.D.)

26 -Ø3.1(Hole)

100P

X13

=130

063

63

1262

(F

lang

e O

.D.)

182

75

100P

X11

=110

081

81

27

100

13

12

262

190

35

130

70

285

630

70 25160

175

310

30

4

1

911

3 2

10

25

262

100P

X2=

200

3131 31

8

90

185 7

100

4343

186

6

14

115

65

186

28 -Ø3.3(Hole)


Out

let d

uct s

ide

(Fla

nge

O.D

.)(Flange O.D.)


(Field supply)

Inspection access panelCeiling


1

2

3

4567891011121314


1

1-88


(A) Indoor Unit: Concealed-Duct (US) Type

SPW-US185H

640

27

750

194

564(Suspension bolt pitch) 38

640

(160

x 4

)

824

(Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h)

2666

37 150

Insp

ectio

n ac

cess

(450

x 4

50)

Fie

ld s

uppl

y

4

5-3.

1(H

ole)

10

30 238 44

143 80

33

200

153

8128

15084

10

30

1 2

3

7 8

2-3.

1(H

ole)

680

126

5

9

692

145

5929

6

2370

423

22 155 23

132

220

220

132

12040

14 1514

14

10-

3.1(

Hol

e)

10987654321

Sig

nal o

utpu

t boa

rd (

AC

C-S

G-A

GB

: op

tiona

l)F

ilter

* F

ilter

uni

nsta

lled

Wat

er in

let

Ele

ctric

al c

ompo

nent

box

Pl c

over

Fra

nge

for

air

inle

t duc

t

Sus

pens

ion

lug

Upp

er a

nd b

otto

m d

rain

por

t (O

.D.2

6mm

)R

efrig

eran

t tub

ing

join

t (w

ide

tube

)R

efrig

eran

t tub

ing

join

t (na

rrow

tube

)

Pow

er s

uppl

y ou

tlet (

2-o3

0)

(Fra

nge

for

air

inle

t duc

t)

Frange for air inlet duct


1

1-89


(A) Indoor Units: Concealed-Duct High Static Pressure Type (D Type)

SPW-D705H SPW-D905H

479 30

010

0 2

100

100

42

1428

1310

711100511170 (Suspension bolt pitch)

964

9⋅10

0P=9

00

4 - 37⋅ 12(Hole for suspension bolt)

26-ø

3.5

(Hol

es a

ll ar

ound

)

28-ø

3.5

(Hol

es a

ll ar

ound

)10

⋅100

P=1

000

106

44

1070

1310

6767

1200

(S

uspe

nsio

n bo

lt pi

tch)

113

(236

)36

436

413

34

6043

32010

050

178

23 209 344

1222

41

Ref

riger

ant t

ubin

g jo

int (

liqui

d tu

be ø

12.7

mm

) (F

lare

nut

)R

efrig

eran

t tub

ing

join

t (ga

s tu

be ø

25.4

mm

) (B

razi

ng)

Pow

er s

uppl

y ou

tlet

Dra

in p

ort (

O.D

. 32

mm

)D

uct c

onne

ctio

n fo

r su

ctio

nD

uct c

onne

ctio

n fo

r di

scha

rge

Uni

t: m

m

Uni

t: m

m

Min

. 600

(Spa

ce fo

rse

rvic

e)

Min

. 700

(Spa

ce fo

rse

rvic

e)

Min

. 610 Min

. 130

Dra

in p

ort

Dra

in p

an

Cei

ling

face

Ref

riger

ant

tubi

ng

Ele

ctric

al

com

pone

nt b

ox

1170

1100

(Sus

pens

ion

bolt

pitc

h)

Air

suct

ion

side

55 5512001310


Insp

ectio

nac

cess

(600

600

)⋅


1

1-90


(B) Outdoor Unit: SPW-C706VH8

Of the 4 o32 holes , use 1 of the 2 holes specified for drain use to install the port.Use rubber plugs to seal the remaining 3 holes.

2 x o32 holes (holes for drain)

1

2

3

45678 Electrical wiring port (o38)

Refrigerant tubing port

Mounting hole (4-R6.5),anchor bolt : M10

Electrical wiring port (o29)Electrical wiring port (o19)Electrical wiring port (o16)

Refrigerant tubing (gas tube),flared connection (o19.05)

Refrigerant tubing (liquid tube),flared connection (o9.52)

Air intake

Air intake

Air intake

Air discharge

Air discharge

8

8 57

60

42

49

111

586

3077

22

39

940

A

18

410

1020

380

2629

0

105 219 75 75

170 660 110

1360

340

40

13

B

340

42

49

111

3077

85 64

22

60

1526

25

4

8

7

6

5

8765

4

32

1

Refrigerant tubing connection portBottom removable connection port

R30

638058

6149

VIEW A

Anchor bolt

7 59

60

333

52

4665

121

43

4 8 6

5

7

Anchor bolt

5.5 62 49

677.

5

VIEW B

Anchor bolt

Anchor boltAnchor bolt

Unit:mm

Remark:There are two types of supplied tubings. The one tubing port o19.05 (flare process) is connected to the flared connection of the gas port side's service valve. The other "L" shaped tubing port is brazed in connection after cutting the tube at the proper length. Then make a brazing connection to the main tubing (o25.4).

Name Figure Q’ty

Reducing Joint Tube (o19.05 o25.4) 1

Joint Tube (o19.05) 1


1

1-91

8

8 57

60

42

49

111

586

3077

22

39

940

A

18

410

1020

380

2629

0

105 219 75 75

170 660 110

1360

340

40

13

B

R305.5 62 49

677.

5

638058

6149

340

7 59

60

333

52

4665

121

43

42

49

111

3077

85 64

22

60

1526

25

8

5

6

8

4

7

5

684

1

23

4

5 6

7

7

Of the 4 o32 holes , use 1 of the 2 holes specified for drain use to install the port.Use rubber plugs to seal the remaining 3 holes.

2 x o32 holes (holes for drain)

1

2

3

45678 Electrical wiring port (o38)

Refrigerant tubing port

Mounting hole (4-R6.5),anchor bolt : M10

Electrical wiring port (o29)Electrical wiring port (o19)Electrical wiring port (o16)

Refrigerant tubing (gas tube),flared connection (o19.05)

Refrigerant tubing (liquid tube),flared connection (o12.7)

Unit:mm

Air intake

Air intake

Air discharge

Air discharge

Anchor boltAnchor bolt

Air intake

Refrigerant tubing connection portBottom removable connection port

VIEW A

Anchor bolt

Anchor bolt

VIEW B

Anchor bolt


(B) Outdoor Unit: SPW-C906VH8

Remark:There are two types of supplied tubings. The one tubing port o19.05 (flare process) is connected to the flared connection of the gas port side's service valve. The other "L" shaped tubing port is brazed in connection after cutting the tube at the proper length. Then make a brazing connection to the main tubing (o25.4).

Name Figure Q’ty

Reducing Joint Tube (o19.05 o25.4) 1

Joint Tube (o19.05) 1


1

1-92

S

HP

M

M

EC

P

1-5. Refrigerant Flow Diagram

1-6. Operating Range

Cooling cycleHeating cycle

Distributor

Liquid tank

Distributor

Strainer

Strainer

Strainer

Liquid lineservice valve

Freeze-prevention coil(Attached to the heat exchanger)

Accumulator Accumulator

Compressor

Heat exchanger

High pressureswitch

Check valve

Heatexchanger

ø25.4 (brazing)

ø9.52

4-way valve

Gas line service valve

Solenoid valve

(3/4")

Temperature Indoor air intake temp. Outdoor air intake temp.

Cooling

Heating

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

32°C DB / 23°C WB 43°C DB

18°C DB / 14°C WB –15°C DB

30°C DB / – WB 15°C WB

–20°C WB–

Indoor Unit: 18, 25, 36, 70 TypesOutdoor Unit: SPW-C706VH8

S

HP

M

M

EC

P

Distributor

Distributor

Strainer

Strainer

Strainer

Liquid lineservice valve

Freeze-prevention coil(Attached to the heat exchanger)

Accumulator Accumulator

Compressor

Heat exchanger

High pressureswitch

Check valve

Heatexchanger

ø25.4 (brazing)

ø12.7

4-way valve

Gas line service valve

Solenoid valve

(3/4")

Indoor Unit: 25, 48, 90 TypesOutdoor Unit: SPW-C906VH8

Solenoid valve

Solenoid valve


1

1-93

Indoor air intake temp (WB)

Indoor air intake temp (WB)

Indoor air intake temp (°C DB)

Indoor air intake temp (°C DB)

1-7. Capacity Correction Graph According to Temperature Condition

60

80

80

60

40

100

120

140

22WB19WB16WB

22WB19WB16WB

3525155-15 45

100

120

140

-5 -10 50 10-5

120

40

60

80

100

120

40

60

80

100

-15 15-20

162024

162024

1.0 1.0 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.890.91 0.88 0.87 0.870.87 0.88 0.89

-20 -15 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 6543

1.00.950.91 0.92

SPW-C706 / 906VH8

Max. Capacity & Input Change Characteristics When the Outdoor Air Temperature Changes :

For 50 Hz and 60 HzFor 50 Hz and 60 Hz

Cap

acity

coe

ffici

ent (

%)

Inpu

t coe

ffici

ent (

%)

Cooling capacity ratio (maximum capacity) Heating capacity ratio (maximum capacity)

Outdoor air intake temp (°C DB) Outdoor air intake temp (°C WB)

Outdoor unit heating capacity correction coefficient during of frosting/defrosting

3. The heating capacity of this table excludes the capacity failure under the condensation (including the defrosting drive).

2. The circle mark " " shows the maximum efficiency and maximum power consumption under the standard condition.* The maximum efficiency shows the maximum value in the parenthesis of the specifications (cooling and heating capacity).

1. The characteristics of this table shows the values under the following condition.Piping equivalent length 7.5mHigh & low difference 0mAirflow rate High

(RH approximately 85%)

Outdoor intake air temperature°C WB

Correction coefficient

To calculate the heating capacity with consideration for frosting/defrosting operation, multiply the heating capacity found from the capacity graph by the correction coefficient from the table above.

Cap

acity

coe

ffici

ent (

%)

Inpu

t coe

ffici

ent (

%)

NOTE:


1

1-94

StrongWeak

Both 50Hz / 60Hz

MODEL :

SOUND LEVEL : 31 dB(A)

27 dB(A)

29 dB(A)

CONDITION :

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

STRONG

Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz)Overall

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)

Approximateminimum audible limit for continuous noise

1.5 m directly below unit

MODEL :


33 dB(A)

36 dB(A)

CONDITION :

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

STRONG

Overall

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)

Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz)



MODEL :


34 dB(A)

38 dB(A)

CONDITION :

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

STRONG

Overall

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)




MODEL :


28 dB(A)

31 dB(A)

CONDITION :

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

STRONG

OverallS

ound

pre

ssur

e le

vel (

dB)

(0dB

= 0

.000

2µba

r)Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz)



SPW-XDR364GH56 (A/B)SPW-X365H




WEAK

MEDIUM

WEAK

MEDIUM

WEAK

MEDIUM

WEAK

MEDIUM

1-8. Noise Criterion Curves

(A) Indoor Units

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type


1

1-95


(A) Indoor Units

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type StrongWeak

Both 50Hz / 60Hz

400063 125 250 800020001000500Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz)

Overall

MODEL :

:

:

SPW-XM185H

SOUND LEVEL 41 dB(A)

WEAK 33 dB(A)

CONDITION

STRONG


NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

60

50

40

30

20

10

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)



1

1-96


Wall-Mounted Type

SPW-KR254GH56 (A/B)SPW-KR184GH56 (A/B)

MEDIUM

WEAK

MEDIUM

WEAK

MODEL :


30 dB(A)

34 dB(A)

CONDITION :

MODEL :


34 dB(A)

37 dB(A)

CONDITION :

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

StrongWeak

Both 50Hz / 60Hz

STRONGSTRONG

1 m in front at height of 1 m1 m in front at height of 1 m

Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz) Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz)

Overall

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)


Overall

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)



1

1-97


Ceiling-Mounted Type

MODEL :


WEAK 30 dB(A)

CONDITION :

MODEL :


WEAK 33 dB(A)

CONDITION :

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

StrongWeak

Both 50Hz / 60Hz

STRONGSTRONG


Overall

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)

Approximate minimum audible limit for continuous noise

OverallS

ound

pre

ssur

e le

vel (

dB)

(0dB

= 0

.000

2µba

r)


1 m from front of outlet at height of 1 m

MODEL :


WEAK 35 dB(A)

CONDITION :

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10

STRONG


Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)




MODEL : SPW-TDR484GH56 (A/B)SPW-T485H

SPW-TDR254GH56 (A/B)SPW-T255H



SOUND LEVEL : STRONG 43 dB(A)

WEAK 37 dB(A)

CONDITION :

400063 125 250 800020001000500

60

50

40

30

20

10


Overall

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50




1

1-98


Concealed-Duct Type

Single Phase, 50 HzSingle Phase, 50 Hz

MODEL : SPW-UR184GH56 (A/B)SPW-UR184SH56BSPW-U185HSPW-U185SHT

MODEL : SPW-UR254GH56 (A/B)SPW-UR254SH56BSPW-U255HSPW-U255SHT

SOUND LEVEL :

CONDITION : Under the unit 1.5 m

SOURCE : 220 - 230 - 240 V,

SOUND LEVEL : STRONG 34 dB(A), NC 22 / WEAK 27 dB(A), NC 18STRONG 30 dB(A), NC 23 / WEAK 25 dB(A), NC 17


SOURCE : 220 - 230 - 240 V,

60

50

40

30

20

10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

NC-50

NC-40

NC-30

NC-20

60

50

40

30

20

10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

NC-50

NC-40

NC-30

NC-20

Sou

nd P

ress

ure

Leve

l (dB

)(0

dB

= 0

.000

2 µb

ar)


Sou

nd P

ress

ure

Leve

l (dB

)(0

dB

= 0

.000

2 µb

ar)


StrongWeak

Both 50Hz / 60Hz

MODEL : SPW-UR364GH56 (A/B)SPW-UR364SH56BSPW-U365HSPW-U365SHT SPW-U485SHT

MODEL : SPW-UR484GH56 (A/B)SPW-UR484SH56BSPW-U485H

SOUND LEVEL :


SOURCE : 220 - 230 - 240 V, Single Phase, 50Hz Single Phase, 50Hz

SOUND LEVEL :


SOURCE : 220 - 230 - 240 V,

60

50

40

30

20

10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

NC-50

NC-40

NC-30

NC-20

60

50

40

30

20

10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000

NC-50

NC-40

NC-30

NC-20

Sou

nd P

ress

ure

Leve

l (dB

)(0

dB

= 0

.000

2 µb

ar)

Sou

nd P

ress

ure

Leve

l (dB

)(0

dB

= 0

.000

2 µb

ar)


STRONG 40 dB(A), NC 33 / WEAK 33 dB(A), NC 25STRONG 38 dB(A), NC 30 / WEAK 31 dB(A), NC 21

1.5

m

Air discharge

(Concealed-Duct Type)

Air intakeUnit


Auxiliary Duct of 2 m length


REMARKS: 1. Value obtained in the actual place where the unit is installed may be slightly higher than the values shown in this graph because of the conditions of operation, the structure of the building, the background noise and other factors.

2. The test results were obtained from an anechoic room.3. The layout of the testing condition is shown at right.

To evaluate the noise level, the maximum value of the measured sound pressure level is used. Read the value at each frequency level (on horizontal axis, center of the sound pressure band) from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz, and select the corresponding maximum value indicated on the vertical axis.

NOTE






1

1-99


Concealed-Duct Type

StrongWeak

Both 50Hz / 60Hz

400063 125 250 800020001000500Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz)

Overall

MODEL :

:

:

SPW-US185H

SOUND LEVEL 35 dB(A)

WEAK 31 dB(A)

CONDITION

STRONG


60

50

40

30

20

10

Sou

nd p

ress

ure

leve

l (dB

)(0

dB =

0.0

002µ

bar)


NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

1.5

m

Air discharge

(Concealed-Duct Type)

Air intakeUnit




REMARKS: 1. Value obtained in the actual place where the unit is installed may be slightly higher than the values shown in this graph because of the conditions of operation, the structure of the building, the background noise and other factors.

2. The test results were obtained from an anechoic room.3. The layout of the testing condition is shown at right.

To evaluate the noise level, the maximum value of the measured sound pressure level is used. Read the value at each frequency level (on horizontal axis, center of the sound pressure band) from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz, and select the corresponding maximum value indicated on the vertical axis.

NOTE


1

1-100


Concealed-Duct High Static Pressure Type

SOUND LEVEL :

CONDITION : WEAK

CONDITION : Under the unit1.5 m

MODEL : SPW-D905HMODEL : SPW-D705H

STRONG 48 dB(A),

45 dB(A),

SOUND LEVEL :

CONDITION : WEAK

CONDITION : Under the unit1.5 m

STRONG 50 dB(A),

48 dB(A),

StrongWeak

Sou

nd P

ress

ure

Leve

l (dB

) (0

dB

= 0

.000

2 µb

ar)



500 10002000 800025010

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

125 4000

NC-70

NC-60

NC-50

NC-40

NC-30

NC-20

63

Sou

nd P

ress

ure

Leve

l (dB

) (0

dB

= 0

.000

2 µb

ar)



500 10002000 800025010

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

125 4000

NC-70

NC-60

NC-50

NC-40

NC-30

NC-20

63


1

1-101


(B) Outdoor Unit

REMARKS:

CoolingHeating

MODEL :

:

SPW-C706VH8 MODEL : SPW-C706VH8

SOUND POWER LEVEL

71 dB(A)

Cooling

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

NC-60

NC-70

:SOUND LEVEL 57 dB(A)COOLING

:CONDITION 1 m in front at height of 1.5 m

HEATING 57 dB(A)

Oct

ave

Ban

d Le

vel (

dB)

(0dB

= 0

.000

2µba

r)

60

70

80

90

50

40

30

20

10

Frequency at center of sound pressure band (Hz)400063 125 250 800020001000500Overall


NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

NC-60

NC-70

:

60

70

80

90

50

40

30

20

10


SO

UN

D P

OW

ER

LE

BE

L

MODEL :

:

SPW-C906VH8 MODEL : SPW-C906VH8

SOUND POWER LEVEL

71 dB(A)

Cooling

NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

NC-60

NC-70

:SOUND LEVEL 57 dB(A)COOLING

:CONDITION 1 m in front at height of 1.5 m

HEATING 58 dB(A)

Oct

ave

Ban

d Le

vel (

dB)

(0dB

= 0

.000

2µba

r)

60

70

80

90

50

40

30

20

10



NC-20

NC-30

NC-40

NC-50

NC-60

NC-70

:

60

70

80

90

50

40

30

20

10


SO

UN

D P

OW

ER

LE

BE

L

1. Value obtained in the actual place where the unit is installed may be slightly higher than the values shown in this graph because of the conditions of operation, the structure of the building, the background noise and other factors.

2. The test results were obtained from an nechoic room.

To evaluate “Noise level” the maximum number of the measured OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL is used.Read the number on each BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES (horizontal axis) ranging from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz and select the maximum value (vertical axis) among them.

NOTE


1

1-102

1-9. Indoor Fan Performance

If external static pressure is too great (due to long extension of ducts, for example), the airflow volume may drop too low at each air outlet. This problem may be solved by increasing the fan speed using the following procedure:

(1) Remove 4 screws on the electrical component box and remove the cover plate.

(2) Disconnect the fan motor sockets in the box.

(3) Take out the booster cable (sockets at both ends) clamped in the box.

(4) Securely connect the booster cable sockets between the disconnected fan motor sockets in step 2 as shown in Fig. 1-1.

(5) Place the cable neatly in the box and reinstall the cover plate.

Booster cable

Booster cable

Electrical component box

(At shipment) (Booster cable installed)Fan motor socket

Fanmotor

HT : Using the booster cable

H : At shipment

20

Airflow (m3/minute)

Ext

erna

l Sta

tic P

ress

ure

0

50

0

5

10

15150

10

Lim

it lin

eLi

mit

line

HT

H

L

100

M

(mm

Aq)

(Pa)

30 40

Airflow (m3/minute)

Ext

erna

l Sta

tic P

ress

ure

0

50

0

5

10

15150

20

Lim

it lin

e

Lim

it lin

e

L

100

M

H

(mm

Aq)

(Pa)

HT

30

Airflow (m3/minute)

Ext

erna

l Sta

tic P

ress

ure

0

50

0

5

10

15150

20

Lim

it lin

e

HT

L

100

M

H

Lim

it lin

e (mm

Aq)

(Pa)

15

Airflow (m3/minute)

Ext

erna

l Sta

tic P

ress

ure

0

50

0

5

10

15150

10

Lim

it lin

e

Lim

it lin

e

HT

ML

100

H

(mm

Aq)

(Pa)

SPW-UR184GH56 (A/B)SPW-UR184SH56BSPW-U185HSPW-U185SHT

Indoor Fan Performance




Fig. 1-1

Fig. 1-2

The vertical axis is the external static pressure (Pa) while the horizontal axis represents the airflow (m3/minute). The characteristic curves for “HT,” “H,” “M” and “L” fan speed control are shown. The nameplate values are shown based on the “H” airflow. For the 25 type, the airflow is 18 m3/minute, while the external static pressure is 49 Pa at “H” position. If external static pressure is too great (due to long extension of ducts, for example), the airflow volume may drop too low at each air outlet.

How to Read the Diagram

Booster Cable for Concealed-Duct Type

NOTE


1

1-103

For Short Circuit Connection

The standard (before shipment) external static pressure is shown in the table below.When using with a higher static pressure, it is necessary to change to the high static pressure mode.

External static pressure 185

Standard 15

High static pressure 40

When using with high static pressure mode, set the indoor unit control board as shown at right.Follow the below procedure while the unit is turned off.(1) Open the cover of the electrical box and confirm that it is the indoor

unit control board.(2) Connect the short circuit connector to the short circuit pin TP3 (2P:

Yellow) of the indoor unit control board.In case of wired remote control setting, do not use the short circuit connector.

TP

6

TP

3

TP

1

Indoor control board

For Wired Remote Control

TP6 TP3 TP1

White Yellow Red

6

1 5 1 4

3

2

Press and hold the , and buttons simultaneously for

4 seconds or longer.

“ ,” unit No. “ ” (or “ ” in the case of group control),

item code “ ,” and settings data “ ” are displayed blinking

on the remote controller LCD display.

At this time, the indoor unit fan (or all indoor unit fans in the

case of group control) begins operating.

Press the temperature setting /

buttons to select the item code

Press the timer time

setting data.

/ buttons to select the desired

* For item codes and setting data, refer to the right table.

0000

Press the button.

(The display stops blinking and remains lit, and setting is completed.)

Press the

remote controller display.

button to return to normal

“ ”.

Standard (setting at shipment)

0003 High static-pressure

Itemcode No. Description

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15Airflow (m3/minute)

SPW-US185H

Airflow (m3/minute)

Ext

erna

l Sta

tic P

ress

ure

(Pa)

Ext

erna

l Sta

tic P

ress

ure

(Pa)

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

(mm

Aq)

0

5

L

H

H

HH

L

External static pressure's upper limit in high static pressure mode

Standard external static pressure's upper limit

Lower limit airflow Upper limit airflow

Rated external static pressure at shipment

Rated external static pressure in high staticpressure modeLower static pressure in high static pressuremode

L

H

L

H

HH

HH

HH


1

1-104

1-10. Airfl ow Distance Chart

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type

If an ultra long-life fi lter or high performance fi lter (65% by colorimetric method) is installed, the vertical air fl ow distance for heating and cooling will be approximately 0.2 m less than the values shown in the graph below.

If a high performance fi lter (90% by colorimetric method) or electronic fi lter is installed, the vertical air fl ow distance for heating and cooling will be approximately 0.5 m less than the values shown in the graph below.

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Horizontal air flow distance (m)

Heating : Distribution of wind velocity

Heating : Distribution of temperature

05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3

(Strong wind : Discharge angle approx.65 ) (Room temperature approx.20 )


1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30


Cooling : Distribution of wind velocity

Cooling : Distribution of temperature

05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3(Strong wind : Discharge angle approx.30 ) (Room temperature approx.27 )

1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

24

26

22


SPW-XDR184GH56(A/B), X185H


1

1-105

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3



1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2


1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

2426

22




1

1-106

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3



1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


1.5m/s1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

24

26

22




1

1-107

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3



1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

2426

22




1

1-108

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3



1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30




05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2

3


05 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

3

0

1

2


1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

24

26

22


SPW-XM185H


1

1-109



Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)



Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)

Horizontal air flow distance (m)0 1 2 3 4 5

1

0

2

3

(Strong wind : Discharge angle app.60 ) (Rm. temp. app.20 )


1

0

2

3


1.5m/s1.2m/s

0.9m/s

0.3m/s

0.6m/s

0.3m/s

33

2724

30

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)


1

0

2

3



1

0

2

3


1.5m/s 1.2m/s

0.9m/s

0.3m/s

0.6m/s

0.6m/s0.3m/s

20

24

26

26

22

SPW-KR184GH56(A/B)



Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)



Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)


1

0

2

3



1

0

2

3


1.5m/s1.2m/s

0.9m/s0.3m/s

0.6m/s

0.3m/s

33

27 2430

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)


1

0

2

3



1

0

2

3


1.5m/s

1.2m/s0.9m/s

0.9m/s

0.3m/s

0.6m/s

0.6m/s

0.3m/s 20

24

26

26

22

SPW-KR254GH56(A/B)

Wall-Mounted Type


1

1-110

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)




40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0




1.5m/s1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30





(Strong wind : Discharge angle approx. -7 ) (Room temperature approx.27 )

1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

24

26

22


SPW-TDR184GH56(A/B), T185H



1

1-111

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)




40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0




1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30






1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

24

26

22


SPW-TDR254/364GH56(A/B), T255/365H


1

1-112

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)

Ver

tical

air

flow

dis

tanc

e (m

)V

ertic

al a

ir flo

w d

ista

nce

(m)




40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0

40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

3

1

0




1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

33

27

24

30






1.5m/s

1.0m/s

0.5m/s

0.3m/s

20

24

26

22


SPW-TDR484GH56(A/B), T485H


1

1-113

1-11. Intaking Fresh Air of Semi-Concealed Type and Concealed-Duct Type

Precautions Regarding External Air Intake (1) Ventilation Load Ensure that the design of the air-conditioner takes air-conditioning loads into consideration when external air

intake is involved.(2) Restrictions on External Air Intake Ensure that the design conforms to the restrictions on air intake volume stipulated in accordance with the model

of the indoor unit and the intake method. Consideration must also be taken to mixed air content listed in (3) below without fail.

* If the air intake volume does not satisfy the required ventilation volume, air must be fed into the room separately with the use of a total heat exchanger or a fresh air processing air-conditioner, etc.

(3) Mixed Air The amount of external air intake must be set within the scope of the unit’s usage conditions when external air and

internal air is mixed together. This is especially important in the following cases, in which it is necessary to either feed external air into the room after it has been processed or reduce the amount of external air that is fed in.

A When the external dew-point temperature is greater than the dry-bulb temperature of the air sucked into the unit.

Ensure that processing is performed so that the external dew-point temperature is lower than the temperature of the air sucked into the unit to prevent the risk of condensation building up.

B In the case of low external temperatures. There are cases in which the temperature of mixed air is lower than the operating range of the unit if

excessive amounts of external air intake are used when the external temperature is low. This problem is to be solved by either feeding external air into the room after it has been processed or reducing the amount of external air that is fed in.

C When used in combination with humidifi ers External air must always be processed when the external air temperature reaches freezing point to prevent

the risk of the humidifi er freezing.

(4) Arranging Ducts and Filters in the Field External air intake ducting must be arranged in the fi eld. External

air fi lters must also be installed without fail in order to prevent the intake of dust and grit.

(5) Thermal Insulation for Ducts Ensure that all external air intake ducting is heat-insulated

without fail. Failure to observe this may result in the build-up of condensation.

(6) External Air Intake Coupling Ensure that the design for external air intake is coupled with the

fan blower operations of the indoor unit. There are cases in which the dust that accumulates in the fi lter is blown into the room if the external air is fed from the fi lter. There are also cases in which the noise of external air being fed into the room can be heard from the indoor unit if external air is forcibly fed when the booster fan or other components on the indoor unit are not operating.

(7) Booster Fan Selection Select the booster fan in accordance with the resistance of

the external air intake duct (diagram on the pressure loss characteristics of the air fl ow volume for fl exible cylindrical ducts) and the resistance prevalent inside the unit (volume of external air fed and the resistance within the unit).

(8) Attaching the External Air Intake Flange

o100

o125

300.1

0.2

0.4

0.60.8

10

20

30

1

2

4

6

50 100 200 300 500400

Airflow (m3/h)

Pre

ssur

e Lo

ss (

Pa)

/Met

er

Flexible Cylindrical Duct

Air Flow Volume for Flexible Cylindrical Duct-Pressure Loss


1

1-114

00

10

20

30

20

30

40

50

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

5 10 15 2018

Res

ista

nce

with

in th

e U

nit (

Pa)

Noi

se w

ith o

nly

Ext

erna

l A

ir In

take

dB

(A)

External Air Intake Volume (m3/h)

External Air Intake Volume and Resistance and Operation Noise Characteristics within the Unit

Operation Noise (External Air Intake Only)

Duct (ø100) for Connecting the External Air Intake Flange

X Type XM Type

With the External Air Intake Flange Attached

Calculate the operation noise when external air is being fed by combining the noise when only external air is being fed as shown in the graph for operation noise characteristics and the operation noise of the unit as stipulated in the catalogue.

The operation noise conforms to JIS standards and constitute measurements taken in an anechoic chamber 1.5m directly beneath the indoor unit. Under normal circumstances, the values shown here are greater owing to the effects of surrounding noise and reverberation when the unit is actually installed.

00

10

20

30

40

50

60 120 180

Res

ista

nce

with

in th

e U

nit (

Pa)

Permissible Air Intake Volume (m3/min)

Resistance within the Unit OFF

X, XM TypeWhen an External Air Intake Flange (ø100) is in Use

For use with mini cassettes

The operation noise for models that use small units is lower, so use values that are within the range shown in the above table. Using values that exceed these will result in noise when only external air is fed being louder than the noise emitted from the unit.

Type

Permissible Air Intake Volume

18

15(m3/h)

Type

Permissible Air Intake Volume

18

150(m3/h)

The amount of external air that is possible to feed when it is fed directly into the unit (ø100)X, XM Type

The amount of external air that is possible to feed when connected to round ducts (ø100).

US Type

Using values that exceed those shown in the above table will result in noise when only external air is fed being louder than the noise emitted from the indoor unit, so only use values that are within the range of the above values.

External Air Intake Volume and Resistance within the Unit

Duct (ø100) for Connecting the External Air Intake Flange

With the External Air Intake Flange Attached

NOTE

NOTE


1

1-115

1-12. Installation Instructions

Tubing Length(A) Single type

During tubing work, try to make both the tubing length (L)and the difference in elevation (H1) as short as possible.Refer to Table 1-1.

H1

Table 1-1 Tubing Data for Models (Single)

ModelsTubing Data SPW-C706VH8 SPW-C906VH8

Tubing size outer diameter

Liquid tubemm (in.) 9.52 (3/8) 12.7 (1/2)

Gas tubemm (in.) 25.4

Limit of tubing length (L) (m) 100

HeightDifferential of Indoor/OutdoorUnits (H1)

Outdoor unit is placedhigher (m)

30

Outdoor unit is placedlower (m)

30

Max. allowable tubing length at shipment (m) 5 – 30

Required additional refrigerant(g/m) 40 * 80 *

Refrigerant charged at shipment(kg) 5.3 6.5

No additional charge of compressor oil is necessary.

* If the total tubing length exceeds 30 m, charge the amount of refrigerantas shown above in "Required additional refrigerant" for every 1 m inexcess of 30 m for outdoor units.

Single

Main tubing L


1

1-116

NOTEBecause the indoor units run simultaneously, install them within the same room

Table 1-2 Table for Managing Tubing Length and Height Differential

Item ContentsSymbol Actual

length (m)Single Twin Triple Double-Twin

Allowabletubinglengths

Maximumallowable tubing length

One-way length of tubing from outdoor unit to the most distant indoor unit

L L + 1L + 2

L + 1, L + 2,L + 3

L + L1 + 1, L + L1 + 2L + L2 + 3, L + L2 + 4 100

Maximumdistribution tubing length

Maximum length following the first branch point (No. 1 distribution) – 1, 2 1, 2, 3 L1 + 1, L1 + 2

L2 + 3, L2 + 4 20

Maximum length following the second branch point (double twin) – 1, 2, 3, 4 15

Sum Total Length Maximum allowable tubing length and the sum total of other tubing L + 1 + 2 + 3 L + L1 + L2 + 1 + 2

+ 3+ 4 120

Maximum branch tubing length

Difference between the maximum length and minimum length in tubing following the first branch point

– 1 > 21 – 2

1 > 2 > 31 – 3

Max: L2 + 2Min: L1 + 1(L2 + 4) – (L1 + 1)

10

Maximum difference between lengths of No. 1 distribution tubing (double twin) – L2 > L1

L2 – L1 10

Maximumallowableheightdifference

Maximum indoor-outdoor height difference

If outdoor unit is higherH1 30

If outdoor unit is lower

Maximum height difference between indoor units H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, H7 0.5

C

A

A

12 2

C

1

1

2

3

3

4

B

H1

H1

H1

H2

H2

H2 H4

H3

H3

H4

H6H

7

H5

L1

L2

NOTE For refrigerant tube branches, use the optional distribution joints.

For cautions on the use of the optional distribution joints, be sure to refer to the provided instruction sheet. Also, be careful to install them in the correct direction (orientation).

* For connection tubing sizes, refer to Table 1-3.

Maintubing L

Distribution joint No.1

Distribution joint No. 2

Distribution joint (purchase separately)

A = APR-P680BG (more than 16kW, less than 68kW)B = APR-RTP280AGBC = APR-P160BG

Double-Twin

Maintubing L

Maintubing L

Distribution tubingDistribution joint

Twin Triple

Distribution joint No.2

– –

– –

– –

– H2 H2, H3, H4

(B) Simultaneous operation multi (Twin, Triple, Double-Twin)


1

1-117

Table 1-3 Connection Tube Sizes (Twin, Triple, Double-Twin)

Main tubing (L)

Double-Twin distribution tube (L1, L2)Indoor unit connection tube

( 1, 2, 3, 4)Total type capacity of indoor unit connected afterthe branch

Type capacity of indoor unit 70 90 36 – 48 25 – 48 18

Gas tube ø25.4 ø15.88 ø15.88 ø12.7

Liquid tube ø9.52 ø12.7 ø9.52 ø9.52 ø6.35

Amount of additional charge per 1 m 40 g 80 g 40 g 20 g

Charge with the amount of additional refrigerant calculated using the formula below, based on the values in Table 1-3 and the size and length of the liquid tubing.

Amount of additional refrigerant charge (g)Do not remove refrigerant from the system, even if the result of the calculation is negative.

Additional refrigerant amount (g) = Additional refrigerant for main tubing (g) + Additional refrigerant for distribution tubing (g) – Outdoor unit charge-less refrigerant amount (g)= 40X (a) + 40X (b) + 20X (c) – 1200 (70 type)

Additional refrigerant amount (g) = Additional refrigerant for main tubing (g) + Additional refrigerant for distribution tubing (g) – Outdoor unit charge-less refrigerant amount (g)= 80X (a) + 40X (b) + 20X (c) – 2400 (90 type)

(Use with the current refrigerant charge.)(a) Actual length (m) of main tubing (ø9.52) Refrigerant charge per 1 m of actual length = 40 g/m Actual length (m) of main tubing (ø12.7) Refrigerant charge per 1 m of actual length = 80 g/m(b) Total length of distribution tubing (ø9.52) Refrigerant charge per 1 m of actual length = 40 g/m(c) Total length of distribution tubing (ø6.35) Refrigerant charge per 1 m of actual length = 20 g/m

Example: 70 Type Sample tubing lengthsL = 35 m 1 = 5 m

L1 = 10 m 2 = 5 m

L2 = 5 m 3 = 5 m

4 = 10 m

Find the liquid tube size from Table 1-3.L : ø9.52 (70 type)L1 : ø9.52 (Total type capacity of indoor unit 36)L2 : ø9.52 (Total type capacity of indoor unit 36)1 – 4 : ø6.35

The amount of additional on-site refrigerant charge is found by subtracting the outdoor unit charge-less refrigerant amount from the total charge amount for all tube sizes.ø9.52 L : 35 m × 40 g / m = 1400ø9.52 L1 + L2 : (10 + 5) m × 40 g / m = 600ø6.35 1 – 4 : (5 + 5 + 5 + 10) m × 20 g / m = 500Outdoor unit charge-less refrigerant amount –1200

Total +1300

The amount of additional on-site refrigerant charge is 1,300 g.

Table 1-4Outdoor Unit Type 70 Type 90 Type

Outdoor Unit Amount ofChargeless Refrigerant

1200 g 2400 g

L

L1 L2

4321

Outdoor unit (70 Type)

Indoor unit (18 type × 4)

40 g


1

1-118

This unit requires no additional refrigerant charge up to tubing length 30 m. In case of more than 30 m, additional refrigerant charge is required. Refer to Tables 1-1 and 1-3.In case of multi type installation, indoor units should be installed within the same room. If multi type indoor units are installed in different rooms, temperature control may develop problems because thermostat operation must follow the thermostat condition of 1 indoor unit only (the main unit).

1.

2.

CAUTION

WARNINGAlways check the gas density for the room in which the unit is installed.

Check of limit densityWhen installing an air conditioner in a room, it is necessary to ensure that even if the refrigerant gas accidentally escapes, its density does not exceed the limit level. If the density might exceed the limit level, it is necessary to set up an opening between it and the adjacent room, or to install mechanical ventilation which is interlocked with a leak detector.

(Total refrigerant charged amount: kg)(Min. indoor volume where the indoor unit is installed: m³) < Limit density 0.3 (kg/m3)

The limit density of refrigerant which is used in this unit is 0.3 kg/m3 (ISO 5149).

The shipped outdoor unit comes charged with the amount of refrigerant fi xed for each type, so add it to the amount that is charged at the fi eld. (For the refrigerant charge amount at shipment, refer to the unit’s nameplate.)

Minimum indoor volume & fl oor area relative to the amount of refrigerant are roughly as given in the following table.

1013.5

27.0

40.5

54.0

67.5

81.0

94.5

108

121.5

135

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50m3m2

Total amount of refrigerant

Min

. ind

oor

floor

are

a(w

hen

the

ceili

ng is

2.7

m h

igh)

Min

. ind

oor

volu

me

20 30 40 kg

Range below thedensity limit of 0.3 kg/m3

(Countermeasuresnot needed)

Range above thedensity limit of 0.3 kg/m3

(Countermeasuresneeded)

CAUTIONPay special attention to any location, such as a basement or recessed area, etc. where leaked refrigerant can collect, since refrigerant gas is heavier than air.


1

1-119

Table 1-5 Distribution Branch Size ( 1, 2, 3, 4)Unit: mm (in.)

Indoor Unit 18 type

Gas tube 12.7 (1/2)

Liquid tube 6.35 (1/4)

25 type 36 type 48 type

15.88 (5/8)

9.52 (3/8)

BB

B

C

A

C

A

110

97

72

CC

C

ED

DED

72

110

97175

13511097

EE

FG

FGH

BCD

EF

EB CD F GHDC B EF

114

72AA

A

APR-P160BG (for Double Twin)

for gas tube for liquid tubeInsulation Insulation

Distribution joint

Distribution joint

Table 1-6 Size of connection point on each part (shown is inside diameter of tubing)

Size Part A Part B Part C Part D Part E

mm o19.05 o15.88 o12.7 o9.52 o6.35

Table 1-7 Size of connection point on each part (Shown is inside diameters of tubing)

Size Part A Part B Part C Part D

mm o28.58 o25.4 o22.22 o19.05

Size Part E Part F Part G Part H

mm o15.88 o12.7 o9.52 o6.35

APR-P680 BG (for Twin & Double Twin)

for gas tube for liquid tube

InsulationInsulation

Distribution joint

Reducingjoint

Reducingjoint

Distribution joint

Unit: mm

Unit: mm

APR-P160BG: Cooling capacity after distribution is 16.0 kW (54,600 BTU/h) or less.APR-P680BG: Cooling capacity after distribution is more than 16.0 kW (54,600 BTU/h) and less than 68.0 kW (232,000 BTU/h).APR-RTP280AGB: Cooling capacity after distribution is 28.0 kW (95,500 BTU/h) or less.

1

2

100

3580

80(2

95)

ø9.

52ø

9.52

ø9.

52

3

4

5

6

1ø12.7

1

2

100

8080

300

100

ø25.4

ø15

.88

ø15

.88

ø15

.88

1

3 1

111 2

ø9.52 ø12.7

ø15.88

ø19.05

3 1

ø12.7

ø15.88

ø19.05

ø25.4

ø25.4

ø28.58

ø9.52ø6.35

APR-RTP280AGB (for simultaneous Triple)

Liquid distribution jointfor liquid tube

Gas distribution jointfor gas tube

Liquid-tube side tube connector

Gas-tube side tube connector

Thermal insulation for gas distribution joints

Thermal insulation for liquid distribution joints

Gas-tube side tube connector

Dowel pin position

B-CUP3

3 locations

Unit: mm

Optional Distribution Joint Kits


1

1-120

Cut at a position that is as far away as possible from the dowel pin.

If the distribution joint will be cut before use, cut on the line marked “cutting location” in the figure below.

Dowel pin Cutting location

Cut as far away as possible (to ensure proper insertion clearance for the connecting tube)

After cutting the tube, be sure to remove any burrs and tofinish the end surface correctly.(If there is excessive crushing or indentation of the tube, use a tube expander to expand it.)

Check that there is no dirt or other foreign substance insidethe distribution tubing.

Install the distribution tubing so that it is either horizontal or vertical. In the case of horizontal, the L-shaped tubing must be slanted slightly upward (15˚ to 30˚ ).

Use the supplied thermal insulation to insulate thedistribution tubing.(If other insulation is used, be sure to use insulation that can withstand temperatures of at least 120˚C.)

Horizontal Installation

Horizontal line

Horizontal line

Outdoor unit side

Install at a positive angle.(15 – 30˚)

Indoor unit side

Vertical installation (directed upward or downward)

Example showingtubing directed upward

Nitrogen gas replacement required for tube brazingIf nitrogen replacement is not done when brazing is performed on the indoor and outdoor unit refrigerant tubing, oxide scale will occur. This scale will clog the solenoid valves, strainers, and other parts, leading to malfunction.

Installing Distribution Joint Kit (for Twin &Double-Twin) (APR-P160BG & APR-P680BG)

For branching tubes, install 150 mm or longer (including reducer) straight tubing up to the point where the tube branches (or after the point where the tubes join together).

150 mm or longer straight tubing up

Use a tube cutter and cut at the size position thatcorresponds to the field-supply tube size selected based on the total indoor unit capacity. (If the size is the same as the tube end size, cutting is not necessary.)

If the reducer that was supplied in the package is used,perform brazing on-site.

Do not cut in such a way that applies excessive forceand causes deformation of the tube. (This will preventinsertion of the connecting tube.)

Therefore be sure to replace the air in the tubing with nitrogen when performing brazing in order to prevent problems from oxide scale.

NOTE


1

1-121

Installing Distribution Joint Kit (for Triple)(APR-RTP280AGB)

Check the system combination before installing the distribution joints.Three indoor units must be installed within the same room.Use the supplied tube connectors to adjust the tube sizes of the distribution joints.

How to Install Distribution JointsUse the supplied distribution joints to complete refrigeranttubing work.Install distribution joints so that the tubes are horizontal after the branch point.

Orientation of distribution joints

Length requirement for strainer on main distribution tubesideAttach a straight tube 500 mm or longer to the main tubing sideof the distribution joint (for both liquid and gas tubing).

Tubing insulationBe sure to apply thermal insulation to both the liquid and gastubing.Depending on the conditions inside the ceiling, condensationmay form on the insulation material. If high temperatures andhigh humidity are expected to occur inside the ceiling, addglass wool (16 – 20 kg/m3, with a thickness of 10 mm or more)to the below insulation materials and apply sufficient thermalinsulation.

Distribution joint insulation material (supplied)• Use the supplied insulation material.• The supplied insulation material include only a tape for temporarily

fastening.• Use insulation material or other material to seal the joining lines so

that there are no gaps.• Use vinyl tape or similar means to seal and fasten the insulation

materials in place.

Only the distribution joints are horizontal with respect to the ground. The collective tubes are vertical with respect to the ground.

<Gas tube side>

Collective tube

The collective tube and distribution joint are horizontal with respect to the ground.

Distribution joint

More than 500mm

More than 500mm

Refrigerant tubing (field supply)

Seal securely with vinyl tape (4 locations)

Tubing insulation material (field supply; thickness of more than 10 mm)Tubing insulation material must be able to withstand temperatures of at least 120˚C

Refrigerant tubing (field supply)

Only the distribution joints are horizontal with respect to the ground. The collective tubes are vertical with respect to the ground.

<Liquid tube side>

Collective tube

The collective tube and distribution joint are horizontal with respect to the ground.

Distribution joint

INCORRECT Be sure to install so that the tubes are horizontal after the branch point.

InclinationIncl

inat

ion


1

1-122

SELECTING THE INSTALLATION SITE

CAUTION

When moving the unit during or after unpacking, make sure to lift it by holding its lifting lugs. Do not exert any pressure on other parts, especially the refrigerant piping, drain piping and flange parts.

If you think the humidity inside the ceiling might exceed 30˚C and RH 80%, reinforce the insulation on the unit body. Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation so that it is no thicker than 10 mm and fits inside the ceiling opening.

Indoor UnitAVOID:

Areas where leakage of flammable gas may be expected.Places where large amounts of oil mist exist.Direct sunlight.Locations near heat sources which may affect theperformance of the unit.Locations where external air may enter the room directly.This may cause “condensation” on the air discharge ports,causing them to spray or drip water.Locations where the remote controller will be splashed withwater or affected by dampness or humidity.Installing the remote controller behind curtains or furniture.Locations where high-frequency emissions are generated.Places where blocks air passages.Places where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.

DO:

Select an appropriate position from which every corner of theroom can be uniformly cooled.Select a location where the ceiling is strong enough tosupport the weight of the unit.Select a location where tubing and drain pipe have theshortest run to the outdoor unit.Allow room for operation and maintenance as well asunrestricted airflow around the unit.Install the unit within the maximum elevation differenceabove or below the outdoor unit and within a total tubinglength (L) from the outdoor unit as detailed in Tables 1-1 and 1-3.Allow room for mounting the remote controller about 1m offthe floor, in an area that is not in direct sunlight or in the flowof cool air from the indoor unit.

Places where optimum air distribution can be ensured.Places where sufficient clearance for maintenance andservice can be ensured. (See the figures on the right side.)

AVOID:Heat sources and exhaust fans, etc. (Fig. 1-4)Damp, humid or uneven locations.

DO:Choose a place as cool as possible.Choose a place that is well ventilated and outside airtemperature does not exceed maximum 45˚C constantly.Allow enough room around the unit for air intake/exhaust andpossible maintenance. (Fig. 1-7)Use lug bolts or equal to bolt down unit, reducing vibrationand noise.If cooling operation is to be used when the outdoor airtemperature is –5˚C or below, install a duct on the outdoorunit.


Fig. 1-3

Concealed-Duct Type / 4-Way Semi-Concealed Type

Fig. 1-4

Wall-Mounted Type

Fig. 1-5

Fig. 1-6

Ceiling

Wall

Font viewmin. 25 cm min. 25 cm

NOTEThe rear of the indoor unit can be installed flush against the wall.

Air intake

Airdischarge

min. 50 cm

Side view Max. 25 cm Obstacle

1 m

1 m

1 m

1 m

1 m

min.15 cm

Front View

min.15 cm

min. 15 cm

Hot air

Exhaust fan

Out-doorunit

Heat source

Outdoor Unit


1

1-123

Installation spaceInstall the outdoor unit with a sufficient space around theoutdoor unit for operation and maintenance.

(1) Obstructions on the left side, right side and rear side(Front side and above the unit are opened). (Fig. 1-7)

Fig. 1-7* Necessary space is required to unscrew on the rear side

for maintenance and if a sufficient maintenance space is provided on the rear side (40 cm), the space of over 15 cm is enough at the right side.

(2) Obstructions on the front side and rear side (Left side, right side and above the unit are opened). (Fig. 1-8)

Fig. 1-8* For compressor replacement, 50 cm or more is required on

the front side even when using the air discharge chamber.

(3) Obstructions on the front side and above the unit (Left side, right side and rear side are opened). (Fig. 1-9)

Fig. 1-9

In case of multiple installationsProvide a solid base (concrete block, 10 x 40 cm beams or equal), a minimum of 15 cm above ground level to reduce humidity and protect the unit against possible water damage and decreased service life. (Fig. 1-10)Use lug bolts or equal to bolt down unit, reducing vibrationand noise.

Fig. 1-10

Air Discharge Chamber for Top DischargeBe sure to install the air discharge chamber in the field when:

It is difficult to keep a space of min. 1 m between the air discharge outlet and an obstacle.The air discharge outlet is facing a sidewalk and dis-charged hot air annoys passers-by. (Fig. 1-11)

Fig. 1-11

Installing the Unit in Heavy Snow AreasIn locations with strong wind, snow-proof ducting shouldlikewise be fitted and direct exposure to the wind should be avoided as much as possible.Countermeasures against snow and windIn regions with snow and strong wind, the following pro-blems may occur when the outdoor unit is not provided with a platform and snow-proof ducting (Fig. 1-12):

a) The outdoor fan may not run and damage of the unit may be caused.

b) There may be no airflow.c) The tubing may freeze and burst.d) The condenser pressure may drop because of strong

wind, and the indoor unit may freeze.

Fig. 1-12

In regions with significant snowfall, the outdoor unit shouldbe provided with a platform and snow-proof duct.

*25 cmor more

20 cm

or more

15 cm or more

*1 mor m

ore

30 cmor more

Without snow-proof ducting (Low platform)

With snow-proof ducting(High platform)

Min. 15 cmor more

Air intake

Air intake

Air discharge

Air discharge

Anchor bolts(4 pieces)

15 cm

or more

50 cm

or more

Air discharge


1

1-124

Precautions for Installation in Heavy Snow Areas

(1) The platform should be higher than the max. snow depth.(Fig. 1-12)

(2) The 2 anchoring feet of the outdoor unit should be used forthe platform, and the platform should be installed beneaththe air intake side of outdoor unit.

(3) The platform foundation must be firm and the unit must besecured with anchor bolts.

(4) In case of installation on a roof subject to strong wind,countermeasures must be taken to prevent the unit frombeing blown over.

Fig. 1-13

OutdoorUnit

Duct Duct

Higher than the maximum snow depth

Air intake

Air intake

About 1/2 of the unit height

Platform (foundation)


1

1-125

Dimensions of Air-Discharge Chamber : STK-UFV160E

Reference diagram for SPW-C706 / 906VH8

Reference diagram for air-discharge support (field supply) : STK-FV140B

Unit: mm

Unit: mm

In snowy regions, if there is concern that snow may enter the air discharge chamber, remove the base of the chamber before using.

Left side installation fixture (STK-UFV80E)Downward, 2

Right side installation fixture (STK-UFV80E)Downward, 3Center side installation fixture (STK-UFV80E)Downward,

T1.0

T1.0T1.04

Air discharge support (STK-FV140B)1

Left side installation fixture (STK-UFV160E)UPward, 5

Right side installation fixture (STK-UFV160E)6Left side installation fixture (STK-UFV160E)

T1.0

T1.0T1.07

Right side installation fixture (STK-UFV160E)

UPward, UPward,

UPward, T1.08

(Reverse side )

9

25

25 955

0

518

518

550

568

568

CL

62.4

110

110

110

5

(106

.3)

110

110

110

5.2

31

50

441.

590

110

8-o4.5 hole

1

1526

940568

5 6

4

(316)56

170 (110)660

2010

380

2021

340

60

(178

)16

755

5

(303)

217

643

566

8

3

1

2

(Reverse side )7

Air intake

Air intake

Air intake

Air discharge

Air discharge


1

1-126

Reference diagram for downward left side installation fixture (field supply) : STK-UFV80EUnit: mm

7 153

1890

90

224

518

34.5

579

45

562

9

18

87

27

11

3323

21

15

2-o3.3 protrusion hole(reverse side)

3-o6 hole

o5 hole

2

Reference diagram for downward right side installation fixture (field supply) : STK-UFV80E

Unit: mm


3-o6 hole

o5 h

ole7 15

3

1890

90

224

518579

45

562

9

18

87

34.5

8

2515

11

33

23

2132

Cyclic bending

3


1

1-127

Reference diagram for downward center side installation fixture (field supply) : STK-UFV80EUnit: mm

2-o5 hole

Cyclic bending

70

32.5 32.5

714

9090

1835

2818

16

93

212

R 25 70

212

100 1005025 50 25

R 25

R 25R 25

560(495)

10010075 75

(135) 125300

3-o3.3 protrusion hole

(reverse side)

Same on reverse side

4


1

1-128

Reference diagram for upward left side installation fixture (field supply) : STK-UFV160EUnit: mm

o3.3 protrusio

n hole

(reve

rse sid

e)

o3.3 protrusion hole

(reverse side)

3-o5

hol

e3-o5 hole

5

Reference diagram for upward right side installation fixture (field supply) : STK-UFV160E

Unit: mm6

10.5

25

R 5

20

10

10

145.5

15

5.5

43

50

13

7

10

35

7

35

13

10

10.5

25

15 10

5.5

135.5

20

10

5043


1

1-129

Reference diagram for upward left side installation fixture (field supply) : STK-UFV160EUnit: mm


o5 h

ole

7

Reference diagram for upward right side installation fixture (field supply) : STK-UFV160E

Unit: mm8


157

53

26 561.5

10

2333

20

157 15

3

10 11

7

589

80

518

126

578

13

34

11ｰ

53

25

10

2333

3120

556

15

500

o5 h

ole

3 11

7

589

80

518

126

578

13

34

11

Cyclic bending


1

1-130

Min. 300 or more

Min. 1000 or more

Installation with intakes facingintakes or outlets facing outlets

Min

. 200

or

mor

e

Min. 250* ormore

Min. 250* ormore

Not less than 150 or more

Min

. 500

or m

ore M

in. 1

50or

mor

e

The front and both sides must remain open.

Installation in front-rear rows

Installation in lateral rows

(2) Multiple-unit installation

The top and both sides must remain open.If there are obstacles to the front and rear of the outdoor unit, the obstacle at either the front or rear must be no taller than the height of the outdoor unit.

(1) Single-unit installation

If the air discharge chamber is used, the space shown below must be secured around the outdoor unit.If the unit is used without the required space, a protective device may activate, preventing the unit from operating.

Required space around outdoor unit

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

The amount of space required for removing the screws on the rear of the unit.

Unit: mm

Unit: mm

Unit: mm

If in case the sufficient space for maintenance is ensured on the rear of the outdoor unit, installation is possible with the space of both sides of not less than 150mm where marked with * mark.

The front and top must remain open.The obstacles must be no taller than the height of the outdoor unit.

NOTE

Reference diagram for air-discharge chamber (fi eld supply)

The models of SPW-C706 / 906VH8 with STK-UFV160E


1

1-131

Dimensions of Wind-proof Duct : STK-DGV280E


Reference diagram for wind-proof duct (field supply) : STK-DGV280E

Unit: mm

Unit: mm

dischargeAir

intakeAir

Air discharge

Air intake

66097

940

340

450

74 544

2038

0

dischargeAir

dischargeAir

dischargeAir

575

3957

516

4

1526

rectangular hole

130

494 2525

25

pentagonal hole

60

50

50

50

50

450

180

6 hole10-

6X10 elongated hole6X10 elongated hole

308

121.

5

10.5

18

10.5

18

114104 300

201020

544

575

In snowy regions, if there is concern that snow may enter the wind-proof duct, remove the base of the chamber before using.


1

1-132

Dimensions of Snow-proof Duct

Reference diagram for snow-proof duct (field supply) : STK-BDV160E

Unit top, snow-proof duct

Unit right side

Unit left side

Unit front side

Unit reverse side

Unit reverse side

Unit reverse sides, reinforcement brackets for snow-proof vent

Unit reverse sides, reinforcement brackets for snow-proof duct

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8


Unit : mm

Unit : mm

1529

(320

)12

09

997691

2010

380

2021

340

(295)

110(227)

702

660

733

340 (303)2645

1

700

(Unit fixing hole)

7 hole

2-

276.

5

733

232

1209

1498

302645

9810 100

120

102.5

614

(Unit f

ixing hole)

7 hole

7-

518149.57

500

450

150

20

614.

523

4

716

11

55.5

25

3

78

2

1

5

6

4

Air intake

Air intake

Air discharge

Air discharge

Air discharge


1

1-133

1 Reference diagram for snow-proof duct - 1

Space requirements for setting - (1)The models of SPW-C706 / 906VH8 with STK-BDV160E

Outdoor unit M N

SPW-C706 / 906VH8 500 300

Outdoor unit

SPW-C706 / 906VH8

H I J

500 250* 1000

Min. Ior more

Min. Mor more

Min. L or more

Min. Ior more

Min

. H

or m

ore

Min

. Jor

mor

e

Min

. Nor

mor

e

Min

. G

or m

ore


(2) Multiple-unit installation (2 or more units)

Top is open:

Top is blocked by an obstacle:(Both sides are open)

[Obstacle to the front of unit]

Outdoor unit

SPW-C706 / 906VH8

A B D EC F G

150 150

Outdoor unit K L

SPW-C706 / 906VH8 500 150

200250* 250* 150 200

or more

Min. BMin. Cor more

Min. Eor more

Min. Eor more

Min. Eor more

Min. For more

Min

. A

or m

ore

Min

. D

or m

ore

Min

. K

or m

ore

[Obstacle to the rear of unit]


(3) Multiple-unit installation (2 or more units)

Top is open:

Top is blocked by an obstacle:(Both sides are open)

(2) Obstacles on both sides

Notes: 1. In cases 2 and 3 the height of the obstacle must be no taller than the height of the outdoor unit.

2. The amount of space required for removing the screw on the rear of the unit.


Note: The amount of space required for removing the screw on the rear of the unit.


Unit: mm


1

1-134

1Reference diagram for snow-proof duct - 2

Space requirements for setting - (2)The models of SPW-C706 / 906VH8 with STK-BDV160E

Outdoor unitSPW-C706 / 906VH8

O P1000 150

Min. 250*or more

Min. 250*or more

Min. 300 or more

Min. 2000 or more

Q

Q

Min

. Por

mor

e

Min

. Oor

mor

e

Min

. 100

0or

mor

e

Min

. 300

or m

ore


(2) Obstacles on both sidesInstallation is possible with the maximum 3 outdooor units.

[Installation in front-rear rows]

[Obstacles to the front and rear of unit]

The top and both sides must remain open. Either the obstacle to the front or the obstacle to the rear must be no taller than the height of the outdoor unit.

Dimension QIf a snow protection duct is attached after the unit is

installed, verify that dimensionQ is 500 mm or more.

The top and both sides must remain open. Either the obstacle to the front or the obstacle to the rear must be no taller than the height of the outdoor unit.

Note: The amount of space required for removing the screw on the rear of the unit.If in case the sufficient space for maintenance is ensured on the rear of the outdoor unit, installation is possible with the space of both sides of not less than 150mm where marked with * mark.


1

1-135

HOW TO INSTALL THE OUTDOOR UNIT

Installing the Outdoor Unit

Use concrete or a similar material to make the base, and ensure good drainage.Ordinarily, ensure a base height of 5 cm or more. If a drain pipe is used, or for use in cold-weather regions, ensure a height of 15 cm or more at the feet on both sides of the unit. (In this case, leave clearance below the unit for the drain pipe, and to prevent freezing of drainage water in coldweather regions.)Refer to Fig. 1-14 for the anchor bolt dimensions.Be sure to anchor the feet with anchor bolts (M10). In addition, use anchoring washers on the top side. (Use large square 32 x 32 SUS washers with JIS nominal diameter of 10.) (Field supply)

For 8 and 10 HP unit

13 40340

6013

110660170

7575219105

29026

38020

10410

18

Air Intake

AirIntake

Air discharge

2- o32 Specified drain port

940

Drain port Anchor bolt (M10)

Fig. 1-14

Drainage WorkFollow the procedure below to ensure adequate draining for the outdoor unit.

For the drain port dimensions, refer to Fig. 1-14.Ensure a base height of 15 cm or more at the feet on both sides of the unit.When using a drain pipe, install the drain socket (optionalpart STK-DS25T) onto the drain port. Seal the other drainport with the rubber cap supplied with the drain socket.

For details, refer to the instruction manual of the drain socket (optional part STK-DS25T for 8 and 10 HP units).

Routing the Tubing and Wiring

The tubing and wiring can be extended out in 4 directions:front, rear, right, and down.The service valves are housed inside the unit. To accessthem, remove the inspection panel. (To remove the inspection panel, remove the 3 screws, then slide the panel downward and pull it toward you.)

(1) If the routing direction is through the front, rear, or right,use a nipper or similar tool to cut out the knockout holes for the inter-unit control wiring outlet, power wiring outlet, and tubing outlet from the appropriate covers A and B.

(2) If the routing direction is down, use a nipper or similar tool to cut out the lower flange from cover A. (Fig. 1-15)

Fig. 1-15

CAUTION

Route the tubing so that it does not contact thecompressor, panel, or other parts inside the unit.Increased noise will result if the tubing contacts these parts.When routing the tubing, use a tube bender to bend the tubes. In cold-weather regions, in order to prevent drainagewater from freezing, do not install the drain socket cap.Also take steps to prevent water from accumulatingaround the unit.

Inter-unit control wiring outlet

Inspection panel

Power wiring outlet

Cover A

Tubing outlet

Cover B

Right

Down

Rear

Front


1

1-136

ELECTRICAL WIRING

General Precautions on Wiring (1) Before wiring, confirm the rated voltage of the unit as

shown on its nameplate, then carry out the wiring closelyfollowing the wiring diagram.

(2) Provide a power outlet to be used exclusively for each unit and a circuit breaker for overcurrent protection should be provided in the exclusive line.

(3) To prevent possible hazards from insulation failure, the unit must be grounded.

(4) Each wiring connection must be done in accordance withthe wiring system diagram. Wrong wiring may cause theunit to misoperate or become damaged.

(5) Do not allow wiring to touch the refrigerant tubing,compressor, or any moving parts of the fan.

(6) Unauthorized changes in the internal wiring can be verydangerous. The manufacturer will accept no responsibilityfor any damage or misoperation that occurs as a result ofsuch unauthorized changes.

(7) Regulations on wire diameters differ from locality tolocality. For field wiring rules, please refer to your LOCALELECTRICAL CODES before beginning.You must ensure that installation complies with all relevantrules and regulations.

(8) To prevent malfunction of the air conditioner caused byelectrical noise, care must be taken when wiring as follows:

The remote control wiring and the inter-unit control wiringshould be wired apart from the inter-unit power wiring.Use shielded wires for inter-unit control wiring between unitsand ground the shield on both sides.

(9) If the power supply cord of this appliance is damaged,it must be replaced by a repair shop designated by themanufacturer, because special-purpose tools are required.

Recommended Wire Length and Wire Diameter for Power Supply System

Outdoor unit (3-phase)(A) Power supply Time delay

fuse or circuitcapacityWire size Max. length

SPW-C706VH8 14 mm2 116 m 15 A

SPW-C906VH8 14 mm2 96 m 20 A

Indoor unit

Type(B) Power supply Time delay fuse or

circuit capacity2.5 mm2

K Max. 150 m 10 A

X, XM, T, U, US Max. 130 m 10 A

D Max. 50/30 m 10/16 A

Control wiring(C) Inter-unit

between outdoorand indoor units)

control wiring

(D) Remote controlwiring

(E) Control wiringfor group control

0.75 mm2(AWG #18)

Use shielded wiring*1

0.75 mm2

Use shielded wiring0.75 mm2

Use shielded wiring

Max. 1,000 m Max. 500 m*2

Max. 200 m (Total)XM, US, D Types:Max. 500 m (Total)

NOTE*1 With ring-type wire terminal.*2 When (D) and (E) are used together with maximum

length of 500 m for group control, and if the remote controller for the group control is wireless, the maxi-mum length will be 400 m.

(AWG #18) (AWG #18)


1

1-137

Wiring System Diagrams

(for 3-phase outdoor unit: X, K, T, U and D Types)

2

1

U2

U1

3

4

A L1L2L3N

U2

U1

1

2

2

1

2

1

U2

U1

1

2

U2

U1

1

2

U2

U1

L

N

1

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

D

E

C

B

LN

LN

LN

LN

2

1

B

B

C

B

D

D

C

C

L

N

L

N

L

N

5

Power supply220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz*




Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Indoorunit (No. n)

Indoorunit (No. 2)

Indoorunit (No. 1)

Indoorunit (No. 3)

Ground

Ground

Ground

Outdoor unitINV unit

Remotecontroller

Power supply380 – 415 V, 3N, ~ 50/60 Hz

Group control:

WHTBLK

Remotecontroller

WHTBLK

Remotecontroller

WHTBLK

Ground

Ground

NOTE

(1) Refer to “Recommended Wire Length and Wire Diameter for Power Supply System” for theexplanation of “A”, “B”, “C”, “D” and “E” in the above diagrams.

(2) The basic connection diagram of the indoor unit shows the 7P terminal board, so the terminal boards in your equipment may differ from the diagram.

(3) Refrigerant Circuit (R.C.) address should be set before turning the power on.

1(L) 2(N) U1 U2 R1 R2

7P terminal board

X, T Types

Powersupply

Remotecontroller

Inter-unitcontrol wiring

1(L)2(N) R1 R21 2 U1 U2 R1 R2

1(L)2(N)1 2 3 4 5

U1 U2

8P terminal board 5P terminal board

Powersupply

RemotecontrollerU1 U2


U, D Types K Type

Powersupply


* SPW-D905H is only 50 Hz.


1

1-138

(for 3-phase outdoor unit: XM, US Types)

L2

L1

U2

U1

L3

N

L1L2L3N

U2

U1

1

2

2

1

2

1

U2

U1

1

2

U2

U1

1

2

U2

U1

L

N

1

2

2

1

2

1

2

1

D

E

C

B

LN

LN

LN

LN

2

1

B

B

C

B

D

D

C

C

L

N

L

N

L

N

A

(1) Refer to “Recommended Wire Length and Wire Diameter for Power Supply System” for the explanation of “A”, “B”, “C”, “D” and “E” in the above diagrams.

(2) The basic connection diagram of the indoor unit shows the6P (XM, US Types) terminal board, so the terminal boardsin your equipment may differ from the diagram.

(3) Refrigerant Circuit (R.C.) address should be set beforeturning the power on.

Power supply220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz

Remotecontroller

Ground

WHTBLK

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

Ground

WHTBLK

WHTBLK

Remotecontroller

Remotecontroller

Indoorunit (No. 1)

Indoorunit (No. 2)

Indoorunit (No. 3)

Indoorunit (No. n)

Outdoor unitINV unit

Power supply380 – 415 V, 3 N, ~ 50/60 Hz

Ground

Group control:

U1 U2 R1 R2

XM, US Types6P terminal board

POWERSUPPLY

UNIT CONTROLLINE

REMOTECONTROL

LINE




L N

NOTE


1

1-139

CAUTION

(1) When linking the outdoor units in a network (S-net link system), disconnect the terminal extended from the short plug (CN003, 2P Black, location: right bottom on the outdoor main control PCB) from all outdoor units except any one of the outdoor units. (When shipping: In shorted condition.) Otherwise the communication of S-net link system is not performed. For a system without link (no wiring connection between outdoor units), do not remove the short plug.

(2) Do not install the inter-unit control wiring in a way that forms a loop. (Fig. 1-16)

Fig. 1-16

(3) Do not install inter-unit control wiring such as star branch wiring. Star branch wiring causes mis-address setting. (Fig. 1-17)

Fig. 1-17

(4) If branching the inter-unit control wiring, the number of branch points should be 16 or fewer. (Branches that are less than 1 m are not included in the total branch number.) (Fig. 1-18)

Fig. 1-18

Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit

Prohibited

Prohibited

Indoor unit

Outdoor unit Indoor unitIndoor unit

Indoor unitIndoor unit Indoor unit

Indoor unit

Outdoor unit

Indoor unitNO

NOBranch point

Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit

Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit

Indoor unitIndoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit

Indoor unit

more than 1 m

Indoor unit

more than 1 m

less than 1 m

BranchPoint

16 or fewer


1

1-140

(5) Use shielded wires for inter-unit control wiring (c) and ground the shield on both sides, otherwise misoperation from noise may occur. (Fig. 1-19) Connect wiring as shown in Section “Wiring System Diagrams”.

X, K, T, U, D Types

XM, US Types

Fig. 1-19

WARNINGLoose wiring may cause the terminal to overheat or resultin unit malfunction. A fire hazard may also occur. Therefore, ensure that all wiring is tightly connected.

When connecting each power wire to the terminal, follow theinstructions on “How to connect wiring to the terminal” andfasten the wire securely with the terminal screw.

How to connect wiring to the terminal For stranded wires

(1) Cut the wire end with cutting pliers, then strip the insulation to expose the stranded wire about 10 mm and tightly twist the wire ends. (Fig. 1-20)

Fig. 1-20

(2) Using a Phillips head screwdriver, remove the terminal screw(s) on the terminal plate.

(3) Using a ring connector fastener or pliers, securely clamp each stripped wire end with a ring pressure terminal.

(4) Put the removed terminal screw through the ring pressure terminal and then replace and tighten the terminal screw using a screwdriver. (Fig. 1-21)

Fig. 1-21

Shielded wire

Ground Ground

Ringpressureterminal

Specialwasher Screw

Terminal plate

Ring pressure terminal

Wire

Wire

Screw and Special washer

Ground Ground

Shielded wire

Stranded wire

Strip 10 mmRingpressureterminal


2

2-1

2-1. Preparing for Test Run ......................................................................................................................... 2-2

2-2. Caution.................................................................................................................................................... 2-22-3. Test Run Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-22-4. Items to Check Before the Test Run ...................................................................................................... 2-32-5. Test Run Using the Remote Controller .................................................................................................. 2-32-6. Precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 2-32-7. Table of Self-Diagnostic Function and Corrections (X, XM, T, U, US, D Types) .................................... 2-42-8. System Control ...................................................................................................................................... 2-5

K Type 2-9. Caution................................................................................................................................................... 2-92-10. Test Run Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-102-11. Items to Check Before the Test Run ...................................................................................................... 2-102-12. Preparation for Test Run ........................................................................................................................ 2-102-13. Test Run .................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................

2-112-14. Precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 2-112-15. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (K Type) 2-122-16. System Control ...................................................................................................................................... 2-13

2-17. Caution................................................................................................................................................... 2-162-18. Test Run Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-172-19. Items to Check Before the Test Run ...................................................................................................... 2-172-20. Test Run Using the Remote Controller .................................................................................................. 2-172-21. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (X, T, U, D Types) ................................................. 2-182-22. Automatic Address Setting ..................................................................................................................... 2-19

2-23. Caution.................................................................................................................................................... 2-212-24. Test Run Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-222-25. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (K Type) ................................................................ 2-232-26. Automatic Address Setting ..................................................................................................................... 2-24

2-33. Caution for Pump Down ......................................................................................................................... 2-32

X, XM, T, U, US, D Types

X, T, U, D Types (for Link Wiring)

2-27. Caution.................................................................................................................................................... 2-272-28. Test Run Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-272-29. Items to Check Before the Test Run ...................................................................................................... 2-282-30. Test Run Using the Remote Controller .................................................................................................. 2-282-31. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (XM Type) ............................................................. 2-292-32. Automatic Address Setting ..................................................................................................................... 2-30

XM Type (for Link Wiring)

K Type (for Link Wiring)

2. TEST RUN


2

2-2

2-1. Preparing for Test RunBefore attempting to start the air conditioner, check the following:

(1) All loose matter is removed from the cabinet espe-cially steel filings, bits of wire, and clips.

(2) The control wiring is correctly connected and all electrical connections are tight.

(3) The protective spacers for the compressor used fortransportation have been removed. If not, remove them now.

(4) The transportation pads for the indoor fan have been removed. If not, remove them now.

(5) The power has been supplied to the unit for at least 5 hours before starting the compressor. The bottom of the compressor should be warm to the touch and the crankcase heater around the feet of the compre-ssor should be hot to the touch. (Fig. 2-1)

Fig. 2-1

(6) Both the gas and liquid tube service valves are open. If not, open them now. (Fig. 2-2)

Fig. 2-2

(7) Request that the customer be present for the test run. Explain the contents of the instruction manual, and then have the customer actually operate the system.

(8) Be sure to give the instruction manual and warrantycertificate to the customer.

(9) When replacing the control PCB, be sure to make all the same settings on the new PCB as were in use before replacement.The existing EEPROM is not changed, and is conn-ected to the new control PCB.

X, XM, T, U, US, D Types

2-2. CautionThis unit may be used in a single-type refrigerantsystem where 1 outdoor unit is connected to 1 indoor unit, and also in a system where 1 outdoor unit is connected to multiple indoor units (maximum 4).* If multiple indoor units are used, also refer to “2-8. System Control”.The indoor and outdoor unit control PCB utilizesa semiconductor memory element (EEPROM). The settings required for operation were made at the time of shipment.Only the correct combinations of indoor and out-door units can be used.This test run section describes primarily the pro-cedure when using the wired remote controller.

2-3. Test Run Procedure

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

Fig. 2-3

(Power must be turned ON at least5 hours before attempting test run)

Power mains switch

ON

Liquid tube Gas tube

Recheck the items to check before the test run.

Check the combination (wiring) of indoor and outdoor units. (See 2-8-1 to 5)

(See 2-4)

Is system “single-type”? (1 indoor unit is connected

to 1 outdoor unit and remote controller)

Is group control with multiple outdoor units used?

Turn ON the indoor and outdoor power.

Indicate (mark) the combination number. (See 2-8-5)

Automaticaddress

Set the remote controller to “test run”. (See 2-5)

Canoperation be

started?

Return the remote controller to normal control.


(AutomaticAddress)

(See 2-8-3)Setting the Outdoor Unit System Address

Set the outdoor unit system address.

(See 2-8-4)Automatic Address Setting

Use the remote controller to perform automatic address setting.

Refer to “Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions” to check the system. In addition, refer to 2-8-1 to 5 and correct any items that need to be corrected.

Note: Check the indoor-side drainage.

(*1) Required for simultaneous-operationmulti systems and for group control.

(*1)


2

2-3

2-4. Items to Check Before the Test Run

(1) Turn the remote power switch ON at least 12 hours in advance in order to energize the crank case heater.

(2) Fully open the closed valves on the liquid-tube and gas-tube sides.

2-5. Test Run Using the Remote Controller

(1) Press and hold the remote controller button for 4 seconds or longer. Then press the button.

“TEST” appears in the LCD display during the test run.Temperature control is not possible when test run mode is engaged.(This mode places a large load on the devices. Use it only when performing the test run.)

(2) Use either Heating or Cooling mode to perform the test run.

The outdoor unit will not operate for approximately 3 minutes after the power is turned ON or after it stops operating.

(3) If normal operation is not possible, a code appears on the remote controller LCD display.Refer to “2-7. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions andCorrections”, and correct the problem.

(4) After the test run is completed, press the button again. Check that “TEST” disappears from the LCD display.(This remote controller includes a function that cancels test run mode after a 60-minute timer has elapsed, in order to prevent continuous test run operation.)

(5) For the test run of an inverter outdoor unit, operate the compressors for a minimum of 10 minutes (in order to check for open phase).

* When performing a test run using a wired remote controller, operation is possible without attaching the cassettetype ceiling panel.( “P09” will not be displayed.)

2-6. Precautions

Request that the customer be present when the test run is performed. At this time, explain the operation manual and have the customer perform the actual steps.Be sure to pass the manuals and warranty certificate to the customer.Check that the 220 – 240 V AC power is not connec-ted to the inter-unit control wiring connector terminal.* If 220 – 240 V AC is accidentally applied, the indoor

or outdoor unit control PCB fuse will blow in order to protect the PCB. Correct the wiring connections, then disconnect the 2P connectors that are connected to the PCB, and replace them with 2P connectors. If operation is still not possible after changing the brown connectors, try cutting the varistor.(Be sure to turn the power OFF before performing this work.)

XM Type

Fuse 5A

CHK (2P plug)

2P connector (brown)

2P connector (blue)JP003

Power PCB

Control PCB

Outdoor unit control PCB

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)

TEMINAL (CN205, BLK)

R.C.ADD. Rotary switch

C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)

TD (CN024, BLK)TO (CN023, BLK)

TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)

N . P . C H E C K (CN046, RED)

LED2

MODE (CN038)

D115IC001 R.C.ADD. DIP switch

A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-4

CHK (2P plug)


2P connector (blue)

Varistor (black) VA100

Fuse 0.5A

Indoor unit control PCB

NOTE


2

2-4

2-7.

Tab

le o

f S

elf-

Dia

gn

ost

ic F

un

ctio

ns

and

Co

rrec

tio

ns

(X

, XM

, T, U

, US

, D T

ypes

)

Wir

ed r

emo

teco

ntr

olle

rd

isp

lay

Ind

oo

r u

nit

rece

iver

lam

p

Cau

seC

orr

ecti

on

1:1

conn

ectio

n (s

ingl

e ty

pe)

Gro

up c

onne

ctio

nS

imul

tane

ous-

oper

atio

n m

ulti

syst

em(f

lexi

ble

com

bina

tion)

C

ontr

ol b

y m

ain-

sub

rem

ote

cont

rolle

rs

Not

hing

isdi

spla

yed

Not

hing

isdi

spla

yed

Rem

ote

cont

rolle

r is

not

con

nect

edco

rrec

tly.

Indo

or u

nit p

ower

is n

ot O

N.

Rem

ote

cont

rolle

r is

not

con

nect

edw

ith in

door

uni

t cor

rect

ly.

Indo

or u

nit p

ower

is n

ot O

N.

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Con

nect

the

rem

ote

cont

rolle

r co

rrec

tly.

Tur

n O

N th

e in

door

uni

t pow

er.

E01

dis

play

ed

Ope

ratin

g la

mp

is b

linki

ng.

Aut

omat

ic a

ddre

ss s

ettin

g ha

s no

t bee

nco

mpl

eted

.In

ter-

unit

cont

rol w

iring

is c

ut o

r is

not

conn

ecte

d co

rrec

tly.

Rem

ote

cont

rolle

r is

not

con

nect

edco

rrec

tly (

rem

ote

cont

rolle

r re

ceiv

ing

failu

re).

Aut

omat

ic a

ddre

ss s

ettin

g ha

s no

tbe

en c

ompl

eted

.In

ter-

unit

cont

rol w

iring

is c

ut o

r is

not c

onne

cted

cor

rect

ly.

Rem

ote

cont

rolle

r is

not

con

nect

edw

ith in

door

uni

t cor

rect

ly.

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Che

ck th

e re

mot

e co

ntro

ller

and

inte

r-un

it co

ntro

l wiri

ng.

Per

form

aut

omat

ic a

ddre

ss s

ettin

g (S

ee2-

8-4)

.

E02

dis

play

edR

emot

e co

ntro

ller

is n

ot c

onne

cted

corr

ectly

(fa

ilure

in tr

ansm

issi

on fr

omre

mot

e co

ntro

ller

to in

door

uni

t).

Rem

ote

cont

rolle

r is

not

con

nect

edw

ith in

door

uni

t cor

rect

ly.

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Con

nect

the

rem

ote

cont

rolle

r co

rrec

tly.

E09

dis

play

ed—

——

——

——

——

——

——

——

——

—

2 r

emot

eco

ntro

llers

are

set a

s th

e m

ain

rem

ote

cont

rolle

r.

Ref

er to

2-8

-6 M

ain-

sub

rem

ote

Con

trol

, and

mak

e th

e co

rrec

t set

tings

.

E14

dis

play

ed—

——

——

——

——

——

—

Rem

ote

cont

rolle

r cr

osso

ver

wiri

ngis

cut

or

is n

ot c

onne

cted

cor

rect

ly.

Sam

e at

left

Che

ck th

e re

mot

e co

ntro

ller

cros

sove

rw

iring

.P

erfo

rm a

utom

atic

add

ress

set

ting

agai

n.

E04

dis

play

ed

Sta

ndby

lam

p is

blin

king

.

Indo

or-o

utdo

or in

ter-

unit

wiri

ng is

not

conn

ecte

d co

rrec

tly.

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Con

nect

the

wiri

ng c

orre

ctly

.

E06

dis

play

edIn

door

-out

door

inte

r-un

it w

iring

iscu

t or

is n

ot c

onne

cted

cor

rect

ly.

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Ref

er to

2-8

Sys

tem

Con

trol

, and

mak

e th

e co

rrec

t set

tings

.

E15

dis

play

ed In

door

uni

t cap

acity

is to

o lo

w.

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

Che

ck th

at th

e to

tal c

apac

ities

of

the

indo

or a

nd o

utdo

or u

nits

are

appr

opria

te.

E16

dis

play

ed In

door

uni

t cap

acity

is to

o hi

gh.

E20

dis

play

ed N

o se

rial s

igna

l is

bein

g re

ceiv

ed a

t all

from

the

indo

or u

nits

.C

heck

that

the

indo

or u

nit p

ower

is O

N,

and

that

the

inte

r-un

it co

ntro

l wiri

ng is

conn

ecte

d co

rrec

tly.

P05

dis

play

ed

Ope

ratio

n la

mp

and

Sta

ndby

lam

p ar

e bl

inki

ngal

tern

atel

y.

Rev

erse

d ph

ase

in th

e ou

tdoo

r un

itsi

ngle

-pha

se o

r op

en p

hase

in th

eou

tdoo

r un

it 3-

phas

e po

wer

. In

suffi

cien

t gas

Rev

erse

d ph

ase

in th

e ou

tdoo

run

it si

ngle

pha

se o

r op

en p

hase

in th

e 3-

phas

e po

wer

at o

ne o

fou

tdoo

r un

its in

the

grou

p.

Rev

erse

d ph

ase

in th

e ou

tdoo

r un

itsi

ngle

-pha

se o

r op

en p

hase

in th

eou

tdoo

r un

it 3-

phas

e po

wer

. C

T s

enso

r is

dis

conn

ecte

d or

ther

eis

a p

robl

em w

ith th

e ci

rcui

t.

Sam

e at

left

Rev

erse

2 p

hase

s of

the

outd

oor

unit

3-ph

ase

pow

er a

nd c

onne

ct th

emco

rrec

tly.

Che

ck th

at th

e C

T s

enso

r is

not

disc

onne

cted

, and

mak

e su

re it

isin

sert

ed.

Fill

up

the

gas

appr

opria

tely

.

L02

dis

play

edL

13 d

ispl

ayed

Bot

h th

eO

pera

tion

lam

pan

d S

tand

byla

mp

are

blin

king

toge

ther

.

Indo

or-o

utdo

or u

nit t

ype

mis

mat

ch.

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

——

——

——

Che

ck th

at th

e in

door

and

out

door

uni

tty

pes

are

corr

ect.

L07

dis

play

ed—

——

——

——

——

——

—

Rem

ote

cont

rolle

r cr

osso

ver

wiri

ngis

con

nect

ed to

the

indo

or u

nit,

how

ever

it is

set

for

indi

vidu

alop

erat

ion.

Sam

e at

left

Per

form

aut

omat

ic a

ddre

ss s

ettin

g (S

ee2-

8).

P09

dis

play

edT

imer

lam

p an

dS

tand

by la

mp

are

blin

king

alte

rnat

ely.

The

indo

or u

nit c

eilin

g pa

nel c

onne

ctor

is n

ot c

onne

cted

cor

rect

ly.

Cei

ling

pane

l con

nect

or a

t one

of

the

indo

or u

nits

in th

e gr

oup

is n

otco

nnec

ted

corr

ectly

.

Indo

or u

nit c

eilin

g pa

nel c

onne

ctor

is n

ot c

onne

cted

cor

rect

ly.

Sam

e at

left

Con

nect

the

indo

or u

nit c

eilin

g pa

nel

conn

ecto

r co

rrec

tly.

P12

dis

play

ed In

door

uni

t DC

fan

trou

ble.

DC

fan

trou

ble

at o

ne o

f the

indo

orun

its in

the

grou

p. In

door

uni

t fan

trou

ble.

Sam

e at

left

Che

ck w

heth

er th

e fa

n ho

lder

is lo

ose.

Che

ck th

e w

iring

bet

wee

n th

e D

C fa

nan

d th

e P

CB

.

P15

dis

play

ed

Ope

ratio

n la

mp

and

Sta

ndby

lam

p ar

e bl

inki

ngal

tern

atel

y.

No

gas

Sam

e at

left

Sam

e at

left

——

——

——

Che

ck th

e re

frig

eran

t cyc

le (

for

gas

leak

s).


2

2-5

2-8. System Control System control refers to the link wiring connection for control of simultaneous-operation multi systems, group control, and mainsub remote controller control.

2-8-1. Basic wiring diagram 1 Single type and simultaneous-operation multi system

Simultaneous-operation multi system Up to 4 (Double-Twin) indoor units can be connected to 1 outdoor unit for operation.(However, coordinate the outdoor unit capacity and the total capacity of the indoor units.)(It is not possible to connect individual remote controllers for independent operation.)

Be careful to avoid miswiring when connecting the wires. (Miswiring will damage the units.)

(for 3-phase outdoor unit: X, T, U, D Types)

1 2

1 2

12

U2U1

LN

N

U1U212

L3L2L1

LN

12

U2U1

LN

System address rotary switch(Set to “0” at the time of shipment.)

Inter-unit control wiring

Ground

Outdoor unitLeakage breaker

GroundGround

WHT BLK

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Ground

(Optional)

Wired remotecontroller

Leakage breaker

For a simultaneous-operation multisystem, a maximum of 4 indoor unitscan be connected to 1 outdoor unit.

Remote controller crossover wiringfor group control

Remote controller wiring


Fig. 2-5-2

(for 3-phase outdoor unit: XM Type)

1 2

1 2

12

U2U1

LN

N

U1U212

L3L2L1

LN

12

U2U1

LN

Fig. 2-5-1

System address rotary switch(Set to “0” at the time of shipment.)


Outdoor unit

Ground

Leakage breaker

Leakage breaker

Ground

Indoorunit

Ground

WHT BLK

Wired remotecontroller

Ground

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

For a simultaneous-operation multisystem, a maximum of 4 indoor unitscan be connected to 1 outdoor unit.

Remote controller crossoverwiring for group control

(Optional)


2

2-6

2-8-2. Basic wiring diagram 2Group control (when a central control device is not used)

Simultaneous-operation multi system Up to 4 (Double-Twin) indoor units can be connected to 1 outdoor unit for operation. (However, coordinate the outdoor unit capacity and the total capacity of the indoor units.)(It is not possible to connect individual remote controllers for independent operation.)A maximum of 8 indoor units can be connected to 1 remote controller.When 2 or 3 indoor units are connected to each outdoor unit in the refrigerant system, set the system address (refrigerant tubing system address) before turning on the remote power switch. (Refer to 2-8-3. Setting the outdoor unit system addresses.)(Set using the system address rotary switch on the outdoor unit control PCB.)

(for 3-phase outdoor unit: X, T, U, D Types)

1 2

1 2

12

U2U1

12

U2U1

12

U2U1

LN

LN

LN

NL3L2L1

12

U2U1

LN

LN

12

U2U1

1 2NL3L2L1

System address rotary switchChange the setting.)


Ground

Outdoor unit

Ground

Leakage breaker


Remote controllerwiring

Indoorunit

WHT BLK

(Optional)

Wired remote controller

Leakage breaker Leakage breaker

System address rotary switch(Change the setting.)

Outdoor unit

Leakage breaker

Indoor power crossoverwiring – up to 16 units(no-heater units only)

Ground

Ground

Indoorunit

Ground

Indoorunit

Ground

Indoorunit

Ground

Indoorunit

(for 3-phase outdoor unit: XM Type)

1 2

1 2

12

U2U1

12

U2U1

12

U2U1

LN

LN

LN

NL3L2L1

12

U2U1

LN

LN

12

U2U1

1 2NL3L2L1



Leakage breaker

Leakage breakerOutdoor unit

Leakage breakerOutdoor unit

Ground

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Ground Ground Ground


GroundGround


Remote controller crossover wiringfor group control

(Optional)


WHT BLK

Indoorunit

Ground

Indoor power crossoverwiring – up to 16 units(no-heater units only)

Fig. 2-6-1

Fig. 2-6-2

Leakage breaker


2

2-7

(Wiring procedure)(1) Connect the remote controller to the indoor unit re-

mote controller wiring terminal plate (1, 2). (Remote controller wiring)

(2) Connect the indoor units (U1, U2) and the outdoor units (1, 2). Connect the other outdoor units and indoor units (with different refrigerant systems) in the same way. (Inter-unit control wiring)Connect the remote controller crossover wiring to the indoor units (U1, U2) for each refrigerant system. (Interunit control wiring)

(3) Connect the remote controller crossover wiring (2 wires) from the remote controller wiring terminal plate (1, 2) on the indoor unit (unit where the remote controller is connected) to the remote controller terminal plates (1, 2) on the other indoor units. (Remote controller crossover wiring)

(4) Turn ON both the indoor and outdoor unit power andperform automatic address setting from the remotecontroller. (For the automatic address setting procedure, refer to 2-8-4.)

NOTE* Models with auxiliary heaters cannot be used for

crossover wiring of the indoor unit power wires. (Use a pull box to divide the wiring.)Be sure to use the indoor unit temperature sensor (body sensor) when using this control. (Status at shipment.)


2

2-8

2-8-3. Setting the outdoor unit system addressesFor basic wiring diagram 2 (Set the system addresses: 1, 2, 3...)

ON

1 2

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)


TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-7

System address No.

System address 10s digit

(2P DIP switch)

System address 1s place

(Rotary switch)

0 Automatic address(Setting at shipment = “0”)

Both OFFON

1 2

“0” setting

1 (If outdoor unit is No. 1)

Both OFFON

1 2

“1” setting


Both OFFON

1 2

“2” setting


10s digit ONON

1 2

“1” setting


20s digit ONON

1 2

“1” setting


10s digit and 20s digit ON

ON

1 2

“0” setting

2-8-4. Automatic address setting using the remotecontroller

When the outdoor unit shown in “2-8-2. Basic wiring diagram 2” is used for group control of multiple units, use the remote controller to perform automatic address setting. (During automatic address setting, “SETTING” blinks on the remote controller display.)

Press the remote controller timer time button and button simultaneously. (Hold for 4 seconds or longer.) Then press the button. (Item code “AA” appears: All systems automatic address setting.)(Automatic address setting is performed in sequence for all outdoor units from No. 1 to No. 30. When auto-matic address setting is completed, the units return to normal stopped status.)To select each refrigerant system individually and per-form automatic address setting, press the remote controller timer time button and button simulta-neously. (Hold for 4 seconds or longer.) Then press either of the temperature setting / buttons.(Item code “A1” appears: Individual system automaticaddress setting)Use either the or button to select theoutdoor unit to perform automatic address setting for.(R.C.1 is displayed.) Then press the button. (Automatic address setting is performed for refrigerant system 1.) When automatic address setting for system 1 is completed, the system returns to normal stopped status.Again press the remote controller timer time button and the button simultaneously.Then in the same way as above (use the buttonto display “R.C.2”), select the next system and performautomatic address setting.

2-8-5. Indicating (marking) the indoor and outdoor unit combination number

Indicate (mark) the number after automatic address setting is completed.(1) So that the combination of each indoor unit can be

easily checked when multiple units are installed, ensure that the indoor and outdoor unit numbers correspond to the system address number on the outdoor unit control PCB, and use a magic marker or similar means which cannot be easily erased to indicate the numbers in an easily visible location on the indoor units (near the indoor unit nameplates).Example: (Outdoor) 1 - (Indoor) 1, 2... (Outdoor) 2 - (Indoor) 1, 2...

(2) These numbers will be needed for maintenance. Be sure to indicate them.* Use the remote controller to check the addresses

of the indoor units. Press and hold the button and button for 4 seconds or longer (simple set-tings mode).Then press the button and select the indooraddress. (Each time the button is pressed, the add-ress changes as follows: 1-1, 1-2, ... 2-1, 2-2, ....) The indoor unit fan operates only at the selected indoor unit. Confirm that correct fan is operating, and indicate the address on the indoor unit.

Press the button again to return to the normal remote controller mode.For details, refer to the separate manual.


DIP switchSystem address

System address rotary switch(Set to “0” at time of shipment)

System address rotary switch

10s 20sON

OFF

8 – 10 HP

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF


2

2-9

2-8-6. Main-sub remote controller controlControl using 2 remote controller switchesMain-sub remote controller control refers to the use of 2 remote controllers to control 1 or multiple indoor units. (A maximum of 2 remote controllers can be connected.)

Connecting 2 remote controllers to control 1 in-door unit

1 2 1 2

1 2

U1U2

1 2

Connecting 2 remote controllers to control asimultaneous-operation multi system

1 2 1 2

1 2

U1U2

1 2

1 2

U1U2

1 2

U1U2

Remote controller setting modeTo set the remote controller main/sub setting or change the sensor, follow the steps below.

(1) Press both and buttons on the remote controller for more than 4 seconds together.

(2) Select CODE No. with / ( ) buttons.

(3) Change DATA with / (TIMER) buttons.

(4) Press . Finally, press .DATA is memorized in the RCU. (DATA setting will not be changed even when the power is turned off.)Make sure to set [Normal] for RCU. CK.

RCU. Main/Sub MainSub

CODEITEM

DATAITEM

Clock display 12 hours (AM/PM)24 hours

RCU. CK NormalRCU. CK

Room temperature sensor Main unit RCU

K Type

2-9. Caution

This unit may be used in a single-type refrigerantsystem where 1 outdoor unit is connected to 1 indoor unit, and also in a system where 1 outdoor unit is connected to multiple indoor units (max-imum 4).* If multiple indoor units are used, also refer to “2-16. System Control”.

The indoor and outdoor unit control PCB utilizesa semiconductor memory element (EEPROM). The settings required for operation were made at the time of shipment.Only the correct combinations of indoor and out-door units can be used.


Terminal plate for remote controller wiring

Remote controller switch (main)

Optional Optional

Remote controller switch (sub)

Ground

Ground

Indoor unit

Outdoor unit

Remote controller switch (main)

Remote controller switch (sub)

Optional Optional

Ground Ground Ground

Indoor unit 1 Indoor unit 2 Indoor unit 3

Remote controller crossover wiring



Inter-unitcontrol wiringOutdoor unit

Ground


2

2-10


NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Fig. 2-8


(1) Turn the remote power switch ON at least 12 hours in advance in order to energize the crank case heater.


2-12. Preparation for Test Run

2-12-1. Switching the temperature sensor

Temperature sensors are contained in the indoor unitand wireless remote controller. One or the other of the temperature sensors is used for operation.

If (body sensor) appears on the LCD display of the wireless remote controller, then the indoor unit body sensor is used for operation. To switch to the remote controller sensor, open the remote controller cover and press the SENSOR button once. The (body sensor) display disappears and the remote control sensor is used for operation.

NOTE Even if the remote controller sensor is selected, the sensor will be automatically switched to the indoor unit body sensor if no temperature signal has been received from the remote controller for 10 minutes. Install the remote controller in a position where the signal can be reliably received by the unit.

When group control is engaged, be sure to use the body sensor.

2-12-2. Using the remote controller

Face the remote controller toward the receiver (on the main unit). (Fig. 2-9)The signal can be received up to a distance of approximately 8 m.Use this distance as a guide. This distance may varysomewhat depending on the battery capacity and other factors.Be sure that there are no objects between the remote controller and the receiver which may block the signal.

The unit beeps when a signal is received correctly. (For operation start only, the unit beeps twice.)

Do not drop, throw, or wash the remote controller.

Do not place the remote controller in locations exposed to direct sunlight or nearby a stove.

Fig. 2-9

Recheck the items to check before the test run. (See 2-11)

Check the combination (wiring) of indoor and outdoor units.

(See 2-16)

Is system “single-type”? (1 indoor unit is connected

to 1 outdoor unit)

Are multiple outdoor units used?


Set the indoor unit control switch to “TEST”.

(Automatic Address Setting)

(See 2-13)

Can operation be started?

Slide the indoor unit control switch back to “ON”.

(See 2-13)

Turn ON the indoor and outdoor power

(AutomaticAddress setting)

(See 2-16-2) In case of group control

Confirm wiring is done in accordance with Fig. 2, “Basic Wiring”.

(See 2-16-3 to2-16-6)How to SetAutomatic Address

Set the automaticaddress setting from outside unit.

(See 2-15)

Refer to “Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions”to check the system.In addition, refer to2-16 and correct anyitems that need to becorrected.


OPERATION TIMER STANDBY

Receiver

<Indicators>


2

2-11

Indoor control unit switch

OPERATION TIMER STANDBY

Indicator lamps

2-13. Test RunUsing the control unit(1) Change the indoor control unit switch from

“ON” “TEST”.(The outdoor unit will not operate for 3 minutes after the power is turned ON and after operation is stop-ped.)

(2) All the indicator lamps blink while the test run is inprogress.

(3) Temperature control is not possible during the test run.

(4) If correct operation is not possible, the trouble will be indicated by the indicator lamps. Refer to “Table of Self Diagnostic Functions and Corrections” and correct the problem.

(5) After the test is completed, change the control unit switch from “TEST” “ON”. Confirm that the indicator lamps have stopped blinking. (A function is included which cancels the test run after a 60-minute timer has elapsed, in order to prevent continuous test run operation.)

ONOFFTEST

NOTE

This mode places a large load on the devices. Use it only for performing test runs.

A test run is not possible if the power is turned ON with the switch in the TEST position.After the power has been turned ON, change the switch once to ON or OFF, then switch it back to the TEST position.

2-14. Precautions

Request that the customer be present when the test run is performed. At this time, explain the operation manual and have the customer perform the actual steps.

Be sure to pass the manuals and warranty certificate to the customer.

Check that the 220 – 240 V AC wiring is not connec-ted to the inter-unit control wiring connector terminal.* If 220 – 240 V AC is accidentally applied, the indoor

or outdoor unit control PCB fuse (0.5 A for both indoor and outdoor units) will blow in order to protect the PCB. Correct the wiring connections, then disconnect the 2P connectors (indoor: blue) (outdoor: blue, serial 1) that are connected to the PCB, and replace them with 2P connectors (indoor: brown) (outdoor: brown, serial 2).If operation is still not possible after changing the brown connectors, try cutting the varistor (black) (both indoor and outdoor).(Be sure to turn the power OFF before performing this work.) (Fig. 2-10)

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)

TD (CN024, BLK)

TO (CN023, BLK)

TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-10


Varistor (black)

VA002

Fuse (0.5A)

CHK (2P plug)

SW103


2P connector (blue)

ONOFFTEST

2 HP

TESTONOFF

3 HP Fuse (0.5A)

2P connector (blue)


SW103

Varistor (black)

VA002

CHK (2P plug)



2

2-12

2-15. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (K Type)

Wired remote controllerdisplay(Field supply)

Indoor unit receiver lamp

Cause

Correction1:1 connection (Single type)

Group connection (Simultaneous multi system)

Nothing is displayed


• Indoor operation switch is OFF.• Indoor unit power is not ON.

• Same at left. • Set the indoor operation switch ON.• Turn ON the indoor unit power.

E01 displayed

Operating lamp is blinking.

• Automatic address setting has not been completed.

• Inter-unit control wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

• Same at left. • Check the inter-unit control wiring.• Perform automatic address setting. (See 2-16.)

E14 displayed ——————

• Remote controller crossover wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

• Check the remote controller crossover wiring.

• Perform automatic address setting again.

E04 displayed

Standby lamp is blinking.

• Indoor-outdoor inter-unit wiring is not connected correctly.

• Same at left. • Connect the wiring correctly.

E06 displayed ——————

• Inter-unit control wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

• Refer to 2-16 System Control, and makethe correct settings.

E15 displayed • Indoor unit capacity is too low. • Same at left. • Check that the total capacities of the indoor and outdoor units are appropriate.

E16 displayed • Indoor unit capacity is too high. • Same at left. • Reverse 2 phases of the outdoor unit 3-phase power and connect them correctly.

P05 displayed

Operation lamp and Standby lamp are blinking alternately.

• Reversed phase in the outdoor unit single-phase or open phase in the outdoor unit 3-phase power.

• Same at left. • Connect the units correctly.

L02 displayed

Both the Operation lamp and Standby lamp are blinking together.

• Indoor-outdoor unit type mismatch. • Same at left. • Connect the units correctly.

L13 displayed • Indoor-outdoor units are not setting correctly.

• Same at left. • Connect the units correctly.

L04 displayed —————— • Outdoor unit address is duplicated.

• Connect the units correctly.

L07 displayed ——————

• Remote controller crossover wiring is connected to the indoor unit, however, it is set for individual operation.

• Perform automatic address setting. (See 2-16.)

P15 displayed


• No gas • Same at left. • Check the refrigerant cycle (for gas leaks).


2

2-13

2-16. System ControlSystem control refers to the link wiring connection for control of simultaneous-operation multi systems, group control, and main/sub remote controller control.

2-16-1. Basic wiring diagram 1Single type and simultaneous-operation multi system

Simultaneous-operation multi system Up to 4 (Double-Twin) indoor units can be connected to 1 outdoor unit for operation.(However, coordinate the outdoor unit capacity and the total capacity of the indoor units.)(It is not possible to connect individual remote controllers for independent operation.)Be careful to avoid miswiring when connecting the wires. (Miswiring will damage the units.)

(for 3-phase outdoor unit)

Fig. 2-11

(Wiring procedure)(1) Set the No. 1 wall-mounted indoor unit so that it can be operated by the wireless remote controller.

(This is set at the time of shipment.)On the indoor unit control PCBs, set the No. 2 and following wall-mounted units to the sub remote controller.(Refer to 2-16-5.)

(2) Connect the crossover wiring to the lead wires (white/black) that extend out from the remote controller connectors of the No. 1 indoor unit and other wall-mounted indoor units (as shown in Basic wiring diagram 1).Connect the crossover wiring to 1 and 2 on the remote controller wiring terminal plate for units (4-way, ceiling-mounted, etc.) other than the No. 1 indoor unit.

(3) Connect the inter-unit control wiring to 1 and 2 on the No. 1 indoor unit terminal plate, and to 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit terminal plate.Also connect the inter-unit control wiring between the indoor units.

(4) When the indoor and outdoor unit power is turned ON, automatic address setting is performed (when there is only 1 outdoor unit or when the system address is “0”).

NOTE

* If the system address is “0”, automatic address setting is performed when the power is turned ON (in the case shown in Basic wiring diagram 1).This requires approximately 4 – 5 minutes (when the outdoor / indoor unit ratio is 1:1 as shown in Basic wiring diagram 1).During automatic address setting, LED 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit control PCB blink alternately. These LED turn OFF when automatic address setting is completed.

L1L2 L

NNL3

12

12

1 2

21

12

LN

LN

21NL

1 2NL3L2L1

Remote controller crossover wiring(Dia. 0.5 to 2 mm2)Total length of wiring 200 m or less

Example: Using a wireless remote controller with a simultaneous-operation multi system

System address (S2)(Setting at shipment: “0”)

(Using a wired remote controller with a single-type system)

1. Wall-mounted units do not include a terminal plate for connecting a remote controller.

2. To connect the remote controller, a remote controller cord is required.

Leakage breaker

Leakage breakerLeakage breakerLeakage breaker

Outdoor unit


Wall-mounted

typeIndoor

unitNo. 1

2P(white)

Connection to lead wire(White / Black)

Wireless remote controller

For group control (wiring locally supplied)

Wall-mounted

type

Indoorunit

No. 2

Wall-mounted

typeIndoor

unitNo. 3 Out-

doorunit

Indoorunit

4Pterminal

plate


(Fieldsupply)

white black

Ground

GroundGroundGround

Ground

Ground

Ground


2

2-14

2-16-2. Basic wiring diagram 2Group control (when a central control device is not used)

A maximum of 8 indoor units can be connected to a single remote controller.Example: In a refrigerant system where 2 or 3 indoor units are connected to 1 outdoor unit, set the new system address (refrigerant system address) before turning ON the remote power switch. (Refer to 2-16-3.) (Set using the system address black rotary switch on the outdoor unit control PCB.)

(for 3-phase outdoor unit)

12

U2U1

LN

U2U1

LN

12

U2U1

LN

12

U2U1

LN

12

U2U1

LN

1 2NL3L2L1 1 2NL3L2L1

Leakage breaker

System address rotary switch (Change the setting to “1”.)

Wall-mounted

type

Indoorunit

No. 1

Indoorunit

No. 2Ground

Indoorunit

No. 3Ground

Indoorunit

No. 4Ground

Indoorunit

No. 5Ground

System address rotary switch (Change the setting to “2”.)

Leakage breaker

Leakage breakerOutdoor unit Outdoor unit

GroundGround

Indoor power crossover wiring – up to 16 units (no-heater units only)Inter-unit control wiring

Connection to lead wires (Black / White)

Remote controller crossover wiring for group control (field-supply wiring)

Up to 8 units can be set for group control

(Thickness 0.5 – 2.0 mm2, total length 200 m or less)

Leakage breaker

Ground

Fig. 2-12

1. Wall-mounted units do not include a terminal plate for connecting a remote controller.2. For group control of wall-mounted units, connect the remote controller crossover wiring

to the remote controller connector (2P) on the main unit, as shown in the diagram.

(Wiring procedure)(1) Set the No. 1 wall-mounted indoor unit so that it can be operated by the wireless remote controller.

(This is set at the time of shipment.)On the indoor unit control PCBs, set the No. 2 and following wall-mounted units to the sub remote controller.(Refer to 2-16-5.)

(2) Connect the crossover wiring to 1 and 2 on the remote controller wiring terminal plates of the No. 1 indoor unit and the other indoor units (as shown in Basic wiring diagram 2).

(3) Connect the inter-unit control wiring to 1 and 2 on the No. 1 indoor unit terminal plate, and to 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit terminal plate.Connect the wiring in the same way from the other outdoor units to U1 and U2 on the indoor units terminal plates (different refrigerant system).

(4) Perform automatic address setting from the outdoor unit. (For the automatic address setting procedure, refer to 2-16-4.)

NOTE

* Models with auxiliary heaters cannot be used for “crossover wiring” of the indoor unit power wires. (Use a pull box to divide the wiring.)

* Be sure to use the indoor unit temperature sensor (body sensor) when using this control. (Status at shipment)


2

2-15

2-16-3. Setting the outdoor unit system addressesFor basic wiring diagram 2 (Set the system addresses: 1, 2,...)

ON

1 2

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)

TD (CN024, BLK)

TO (CN023, BLK)

TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-13

System addressNo.

System address10s digit

(2P DIP switch)

System address1s place

(Rotary switch)


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“0” setting


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“2” setting


10s digit ONON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting


20s digit ONON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting



ON

OFF

ON

1 2

“0” setting

2-16-4. Automatic address setting from the outdoor unit

When there are multiple outdoor units as shown in basic wiring diagram 2

If the power can be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system (indoor unit addresses can be set without operating the comp-ressor):

(1) Turn ON the indoor and outdoor unit power for re-frigerant system 1.Press and hold the automatic address setting button(black) for 1 second or longer at the outdoor unit where the power was turned ON.

Communication for automatic address setting begins. LED 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit control PCB blink alternately, and turn OFF when address setting is completed.

<Approximately 4 – 5 minutes are required.>

(2) Next, turn ON the power only at the indoor and outdoor units in a different system. Press the auto-matic address setting button (black) on the outdoor unit.

LED 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit control PCB blinkalternately, and turn OFF when address setting iscompleted. Repeat the same procedure for each system and complete automatic address setting.

(3) Operation using the remote controller is now possible.

2-16-5. Indoor unit remote controller main-sub setting

When multiple wall-mounted indoor units are installed for group control in a simultaneous-operation multi system, set the control PCB at the No. 2 and following wall-mounted units to “Sub remote control”.If a wired remote controller is used, set the wired remote controller to “Sub”.If 2 wireless remote controllers are used, set the wireless PCB (DIP switch) on the second remote controller to “Sub”.





10s 20sON

OFF

8 – 10 HP


2

2-16

2-16-6. Indoor unit address settingIf multiple single-type units are installed in the same room the addresses can be set to prevent signal inter-ference. By coordinating the numbers of the indoor unit (wireless PCB) and remote controller addresses, up to 6 indoor units can be controlled independently by their respective remote controllers.Independent control is not possible when a simultane-ousoperation multi system is used.

Checking the addressesPress the remote controller address button to display the current address on the remote controller display.If this address matches the indoor unit (wireless PCB)address, the buzzer will sound.(If ALL is set, the buzzer will always sound.)If ALL is set, operation is possible regardless of the indoor unit address.Point the remote controller toward the receiver (indoor unit) that you wish to operate, and send the operation signal.Remote controller address settingPress and hold the address button for 4 seconds or longer to display the address on the remote controller display. The current address starts blinking.The address changes each time the remote controlleraddress button is pressed: ALL 1 2 3 ... 6.Set the address to match the remote controller you wish to operate.When the SET button is pressed, the address stops blinking and displays for 5 seconds. The buzzer sou-nds if the address matches the indoor unit.

Remotecontrolleraddressdisplay

ALL 1 2 3

Indoor unit PCB address, DIP switch

123

6 5 43 2 1

ON

ONOFF

Add

ress

123

6 5 43 2 1

ON

ONOFF

Add

ress

123

6 5 43 2 1

ON

ONOFF

Add

ress

123

6 5 43 2 1

ON

ONOFF

Add

ress

For address switches 1, 2, and 3, turn DIP switch 1 to OFF.For address switches 4, 5, and 6, turn DIP switch 1 to ON.

123

ON

Fig. 2-14

X, T, U, D Types (for Link Wiring)2-17. CautionThis unit may be used in a single-type refrigerant system where 1 outdoor unit is connected to 1 indoor unit, and also in a system where 1 outdoor unit is connected to multiple indoor units (maximum 4 < Double-Twin >).

This test run explanation describes primarily the pro-cedure when using the wired remote controller.

If link wiring is used, set the outdoor unit system add-ress to allow the combination of indoor and outdoor units to be identified. At the same time, indicate the indoor-outdoor unit combination number in a location where it can be checked easily (near the indoor unit nameplates). (This number will be required for sub-sequent maintenance. Refer to 2-22-2, -3, -4.)

Request that the customer be present when the test run is performed. At this time, explain the operation manual and have the customer perform the actual steps.Be sure to pass the manuals and warranty certificate to the customer

Check that the 220 - 240 V AC wiring is not connect-ed to the inter-unit control wiring connector terminal.If 220 - 240 V AC is accidentally applied, the indoor or outdoor unit control PCB fuse will blow in order to protect the PCB. Correct the wiring connections, then disconnect the 2P connectors (indoor: blue, OC) (out-door: blue, serial 1) that are connected to the PCB, and replace them with 2P connectors (indoor: brown, EMG) (outdoor: brown, serial 2).If operation is still not possible after changing the brown connectors, try cutting the varistor (black).(Be sure to turn the power OFF before performing this work.)

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)


TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-15

Address Address Address Address

Address switchTestRemote controller

Sub On

Main Off

Indoor unit control PCB 2 HP

DIP switch

(SW101)

Address switch

(SW102)

Indoor unit control PCB 3 HP

DIP switch(SW101)

Address switch(SW102)

CHK (2P plug)


2P connector (blue)

Varistor (black) VA100

Fuse 0.5A


Ourdoor unit control PCB


2

2-17


YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

Fig. 2-16

2-19. Items to Check Before the Test Run(1) Turn the remote power switch ON at least 12 hours

in advance in order to energize the crank case heater.


2-20. Test Run Using the Remote Controller

(1) Press and hold the remote controller button for 4 seconds or longer. Then press the button.

“TEST” appears in the LCD display during the test run.

Temperature control is not possible when test run mode is engaged.(This mode places a large load on the devices. Use it only when performing the test run.)


The outdoor unit will not operate for approximately 3 minutes after the power is turned ON or after it stops operating.

(3) If normal operation is not possible, a code appears on th remote controller LCD display.Refer to “2-21. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections” on the next page, and correct the problem.

(4) After the test run is completed, press the button again.Check that “TEST” disappears from the LCD display.(This remote controller includes a function that can-cels test run mode after a 60-minute timer has elaps-ed, in order to prevent continuous test run operation.)

(5) For the test run of an inverter outdoor unit, operate the compressors for a minimum of 10 minutes (in order to check for open phase).* When performing a test run using a wired remote

controller, operation is possible without attaching thevcassette-type ceiling panel.( “P09” will not be displayed.)


Check the combination (wiring) of indoor and outdoor units. (See 2-22-1)

Is system “single-type”?

Is outdoor unit multiple?

(See 2-22-2) How to Set the Outdoor Unit System Address


(See 2-22-1) How to Set Automatic Address

Set the automatic address setting from outside unit or remote controller.

(*) Indicate (mark) the combination number. (See 2-22-3, -4)

Turn ON the indoor and outdoor power. Automatic Address


Canoperation be

started?



AutomaticAddress

(See 2-21)

Refer to “Table of Self-DiagnosticFunctions” to check the system. In addition, refer to Item 2-22 and correct any items that need to be corrected.


(*) Required for simultaneous-operationmulti systems and for group control.

NOTE


2

2-18

2-21. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (X, T, U, D Types)

Wired remote controllerdisplay


CauseCorrectionGroup connection and simultaneous-operation multi

system


Nothing is displayed.

• Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit correctly.

• Indoor unit power is not ON.

Connect the remote controller correctly. Turn ON the indoor unit power.

E01 displayed

Operation lamp is blinking.

• Automatic address setting has not been completed.• Inter-unit control wiring is cut or is not connected

correctly. • Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit

correctly.

Check the remote controller and inter-unit control wiring.Perform automatic address setting (2-22).

E02 displayed • Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit correctly.

Connect the remote controller correctly.

E14 displayed • Remote controller crossover wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

Check the remote controller crossover wiring. Perform automatic address setting again.

E04 displayed



Connect the wiring correctly.

E06 displayed • Inter-unit control wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

Refer to 2-22-1. Basic wiring diagram, and make the correct setting.

E15 displayed • Indoor unit capacity is too low. Check that the total capacities of the indoor and outdoor units are appropriate.

E16 displayed • Indoor unit capacity is too high.

P05 displayed


• Reversed phase at one of the outdoor units in the group. • Insufficient gas

Reverse 2 phases of the outdoor unit 3-phase power and connect them correctly.Fill up the gas appropriately.

P09 displayed Timer lamp andStandby lamp are blinking alternately.

• Ceiling panel connector at one of the indoor units in the group is not connected correctly.

Connect the indoor unit ceiling panel connector correctly.

P12 displayed • DC fan trouble at one of the indoor units in the group. Check whether the fan holder is loose. Check the wiring between the DC fan and the PCB.

L02L13 displayed Both the

Operation lamp and Standby lamp are blinking together.

• Indoor-outdoor unit type mismatch. Check that the indoor and outdoor unit types are correct.

L07 displayed • Remote controller crossover wiring is connected to the indoor unit, however it is set for individual operation.

Perform automatic address setting (2-22).

L10 displayed • Check outdoor operation with separate maintenance-use remote controller.


2

2-19

2-22. Automatic Address Setting2-22-1. Basic wiring diagram

Link wiring

A terminal plug (black) is attached to each of the outdoor unit control PCBs. At only one outdoor unit,leave the terminal plug short-circuit socket on the “Yes” side. At all the other outdoor units, change the socket (from “Yes” to “No”).A maximum of 8 indoor units can be connected to 1 remote controller for group control.

3-1 3-21-1 1-2

2-1 2-2 2-3 3-3 3-4

Fig. 2-17

Automatic address setting from the outdoor unit (X, T, U, D Types)

Case 1 If the power can be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system, the indoor unit addresses can be set without running the compressor.

(1) Turn on the indoor and outdoor unit power for refrigerant system 1.Press and hold the automatic address setting button(black) for 1 second or longer at the outdoor unit where the power was turned ON.

Communication for automatic address setting begins.

LED 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit control PCB blink alternately, and turn OFF when address setting is completed.


(2) Next, turn ON the power only at the indoor and outdoor units in a different system. Press the automatic address setting button (black) on the outdoor unit.

LED 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit control PCB blinkalternately, and turn OFF when address setting iscompleted.

Repeat the same procedure for each system and complete automatic address setting.


Case 2 If the power cannot be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system:The compressors must be run in order to automatically set the indoor unit addresses. Therefore perform this step after completing the refrigerant tubing work.

(1) Turn ON the power to the indoor and outdoor units in all refrigerant systems.

When setting addresses in cooling mode(2) Short-circuit the mode-change pin at the outdoor unit

where automatic address setting will be performed. Then press the automatic address setting button (black).

When setting addresses in heating mode(2) Press the automatic address setting button (black)

at the outdoor unit where automatic address setting will be performed.

(3) LED 1 and 2 blink alternately. The compressors begin running in Cooling (or Heating) mode. Communication for automatic address setting begins, using the temperature changes at the indoor units.<All indoor units are in operating status.>

Address setting is completed when the compressors stop and the LED indicators turn OFF. <Approxima-tely 15 minutes is required for 1 system.>If address setting fails, LED 1 and 2 blink simultane-ously and the alarm contents are displayed at the remote controller.

(4) After 1 system is completed, be sure to press the automatic address setting button (black) at the otheroutdoor units to complete automatic address setting in the same way for each system.


System address rotary switch on the outdoor unit PCB

Terminal plate 1, 2


(Change setting to “1”)

Refrigerant system No. 1

No. 1


Terminal plate 1, 2

Outdoor unit



No. 2 Change the terminal plug (black) short- circuit socket

No. 3 Change the terminal plug (black) short-circuit socket

Remote controller




Remote controllerRemote controller

Indoor unit

NOTE


2

2-20

Automatic address setting using the remote cont-rollerCase 3

If the power can be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system (indoor unit addresses can be set without running the compressor):

Individual system automatic address setting: Display item code “A1”.

(1) Press the remote controller timer time button and button simultaneously.(Hold for 4 seconds or longer.)

(2) Then press either the temperature setting or button. (Confirm that the item code is “A1”.)

(3) Use either the or button to select theoutdoor unit to perform automatic address setting for. Then press the button.

During automatic address setting, “SETTING” blinks on the remote controller display. This display disappears when address setting is completed.

Case 4If the power cannot be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system:(The compressors must be run in order to automat-ically set the indoor unit addresses. Therefore per-form this step after completing the refrigerant tubing work.)

All-systems automatic address setting: Display item code “AA”.

(1) Press the remote controller timer time button and button simultaneously. (Hold for 4 seconds or longer.)

(2) Next press the button.(Automatic address setting is performed in sequence for all outdoor units from No. 1 to No. 30. When automatic address setting is completed, the units return to normal stopped status.)<Approximately 15 minutes is required for each system.>


Fig. 2-18

2-22-2. Setting outdoor unit system addressesFor the basic wiring diagram (Set the system addresses: 1, 2, 3...)

ON

1 2

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)


TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-19

System addressNo.


(2P DIP switch)


(Rotary switch)


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“0” setting


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“2” setting


10s digit ONON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting


20s digit ONON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting



ON

OFF

ON

1 2

“0” setting





10s 20sON

OFF

8 – 10 HP

( “R.C.1” is displayed, and automatic address setting is performed for refrigerant system 1.)When automatic address setting for system 1 is completed, the units return to normal stopped status. <Approximately 4 – 5 minutes are required.>


2

2-21

2-22-3. Checking indoor unit addressesUse the remote controller to check the addresses of the indoor units. Press and hold the button and button for 4 seconds or longer (simple settings mode, “ALL” appears on the remote controller). Then press the button and select the indoor address.(For the system addresses of the No. 1 outdoor unit, each time the button is pressed, the address changes as follows: 1-1, 1-2, ...)The indoor unit fan operates only at the selected indoor unit.Confirm the indoor unit address. (For the system addresses of the No. 2 outdoor unit, the displayed addresses are 2-1, 2-2, ...) Press the button again to return to the normal remote controller mode.

Fig. 2-20



easily checked when multiple units are installed, ensure that the indoor and outdoor unit numbers correspond to the system address number on the outdoor unit control PCB, and use a magic marker or similar means which cannot be easily removed to indicate the numbers in an easily visible location on the indoor units (near the indoor unit nameplates).

Example: (Outdoor) 1 – (Indoor) 1, 2... (Outdoor) 2 – (Indoor) 1, 2...

(2) These numbers will be needed for maintenance. Be sure to indicate them.

K Type (for Link Wiring)

2-23. CautionThis unit may be used in a single-type refrigerantsystem where 1 outdoor unit is connected to 1 indoor unit, and also in a system where 1 outdoor unit is connected to multiple indoor units (maxi-mum 4). If link wiring is used, set the outdoor unit system add-ress to allow the combination of indoor and outdoor units to be identified. At the same time, indicate the indoor-outdoor unit combination number in a location where it can be checked easily (near the indoor unit nameplates). (This number will be required for subsequent maintenance. Refer to 2-26-3, -4.)Request that the customer be present when the test run is performed. At this time, explain the operation manual and have the customer perform the actual steps.Be sure to pass the manuals and warranty certificate to the customer.

Check that the 220 – 240 V AC wiring is not connected to the inter-unit control wiring connector terminal.If 220 – 240 V AC is accidentally applied, the indoor oroutdoor unit control PCB fuse (0.5 A for both indoor and outdoor units) will blow in order to protect the PCB. Correct the wiring connections, then disconnect the 2P connectors (indoor: blue, OC) (outdoor: blue, serial 1) that are connected to the PCB, and replace them with 2P connectors (indoor: brown, EMG) (outdoor: brown, serial 2).If operation is still not possible after changing the brownconnectors, try cutting the varistor (black) (both indoor and outdoor).(Be sure to turn the power OFF before performing this work.)

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)


TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)

N.P.CHECK(CN046, RED) LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-21


Varistor (black)

VA002

Fuse (0.5A)

CHK (2P plug)

SW103


2P connector (blue)

ONOFFTEST

2 HP

TESTOFFON

3 HP Fuse (0.5A)

2P connector (blue)


SW103

Varistor (black)

VA002

CHK (2P plug)

Ourdoor unit control PCB


2

2-22


YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

Fig. 2-22



Is system “single-type”?(1 indoor unit is connected

to 1 outdoor unit)

Are multiple outdoor units used?



(See 2-26-1, -2) How to Set Automatic Address

Set the automatic address setting from outside unit.

Indicate (mark) the combination number.

Turn the power back ON to the indoor unit.

(See 2-26-3, -4)

Set the indoor unit control unit to “TEST”. (See 2-26-3)

Canoperation be

started?

(See 2-13)


(AutomaticAddress)

(AutomaticAddress)

(See 2-25)


Refer to “Table of Self-DiagnosticFunctions” to check the system. In addition, refer to 2-26 and correct any items that need to be corrected.



2

2-23

2-25. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (K Type)


display


CauseCorrectionGroup connection and simultaneous-operation multi

system


Nothing is displayed.

• Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit correctly.

• Indoor unit power is not ON.

Connect the remote controller correctly. Turn ON the indoor unit power.

E01 displayed

Operation lamp is blinking.

• Automatic address setting has not been completed.• Inter-unit control wiring is cut or is not connected

correctly. • Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit

correctly.

Check the remote controller and inter-unit control wiring.Perform automatic address setting (2-26).

E02 displayed • Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit correctly.

Connect the remote controller correctly.

E14 displayed • Remote controller crossover wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

Check the remote controller crossover wiring. Perform automatic address setting again.

E04 displayed



Connect the wiring correctly.

E06 displayed • Inter-unit control wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

Refer to 2-26-1. Basic wiring diagram, and make the correct setting.

E15 displayed • Indoor unit capacity is too low. Check that the total capacities of the indoor and outdoor units are appropriate.

E16 displayed • Indoor unit capacity is too high.

P05 displayed

Timer lamp and Standby lamp are blinking alternately.

• Reversed phase or open phase in the 3-phase power at one of the outdoor units in the group.

• Insufficient gas

Reverse 2 phases of the outdoor unit 3-phase power and connect them correctly.Fill up the gas appropriately.

P09 displayed Timer lamp and Standby lamp are blinking alternately.

• Ceiling panel connector at one of the indoor units in the group is not connected correctly.


P12 displayed • DC fan trouble at one of the indoor units in the group. Check whether the fan holder is loose. Check the wiring between the DC fan and the PCB.

L02L13 displayed Both the

Operation lamp and Standby lamp are blinking together.

• Indoor-outdoor unit type mismatch. Check that the indoor and outdoor unit types are correct.

L07 displayed • Remote controller crossover wiring is connected to the indoor unit, however it is set for individual operation.

Perform automatic address setting (2-26).

L10 displayed • Check outdoor operation with separate maintenance-use remote controller.


2

2-24

2-26. Automatic Address Setting

2-26-1. Basic wiring diagram

Link wiring

A terminal plug (black) is attached to each of the outdoor unit control PCBs. At only 1 outdoor unit, leave the terminal plug short-circuit socket on the “Yes” side. At all the other outdoor units, change the socket (from “Yes” to “No”).A maximum of 8 indoor units can be connected to 1 remote controller for group control.

3-1 3-2 3-31-1 1-2 1-3

2-1 2-2

* If wall-mounted type units are used for a simultaneous operation multi system (group control), refer to 2-16.System Control (basic wiring diagrams and wiring procedures) when wiring.

Fig. 2-23



System address 1

No. 1

Remote controller crossover wiring for group control

Terminal plate 1, 2

Terminal plate 1, 2

Outdoor unit

Indoor unit

Wireless remote controller


Wiredremote controller



No. 2 No. 3


System address 2


System address 3

Change the terminal plug (black) short- circuit socket


NOTE


2

2-25

2-26-2. Setting the outdoor unit system addressesFor basic wiring diagram (Set the system addresses: 1, 2, 3...)

ON

1 2

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)


TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-24

System addressNo.


(2P DIP switch)


(Rotary switch)


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“0” setting


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting


Both OFFON

1 2

ON

OFF

“2” setting


10s digit ONON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting


20s digit ONON

1 2

ON

OFF

“1” setting



ON

OFF

ON

1 2

“0” setting

Case 1 If the power can be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system:(The indoor unit addresses can be set without running the compressor.)





10s 20sON

OFF

8 – 10 HP


2

2-26

Automatic address setting from the outdoor unit (K type)

(1) Turn on the indoor and outdoor unit power for refrigerant system 1.Press and hold the automatic address setting button(black) for 1 second or longer at the outdoor unit where the power was turned ON.The compressor operates when the power is turned ON at a different outdoor unit.


LED 1 and 2 on the outdoor unit control PCB blinkalternately, and turn OFF when address setting iscompleted. <Approximately 4 – 5

minutes are required.>(2) Next, turn ON the power only at the indoor and out-

door units in a different system. Press the automatic address setting button (black) on the outdoor unit.




Case 2If the power cannot be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system:The compressors must be run in order to automatic-ally set the indoor unit addresses. Therefore perform this step after completing the refrigerant tubing work.


When setting addresses in cooling mode (2) Short-circuit the mode-change pin at the outdoor unit




(3) LED 1 and 2 blink alternately. The compressors be-gin running in cool (or heat) mode. Communication for automatic address setting begins, using the tem-perature changes at the indoor units.

Address setting is completed when the compressors stop and the LED indicators turn OFF. <Approxi-mately 15 minutes is required for 1 system.>If address setting fails, LED 1 and 2 blink simultan-eously and the alarm contents are displayed at the remote controller.

(4) After 1 system is completed, be sure to press theautomatic address setting button (black) at the otheroutdoor units to complete automatic address setting in the same way for each system.


2-26-3. Checking indoor unit addressesUse the remote controller to check the addresses of the indoor units. Press and hold the button and butt-on for 4 seconds or longer (simple settings mode, “ALL” appears on the remote controller). Then press the button and select the indoor address.(For the system addresses of the No. 1 outdoor unit, each time the button is pressed, the address changes as follows: 1-1, 1-2, ...)The indoor unit fan operates only at the selected indoor unit. Confirm the indoor unit address. (For the system addresses of the No. 2 outdoor unit, the displayed addresses are 2-1, 2-2, ...)Press the button again to return to the normal remote controller mode.

Fig. 2-25



easily checked when multiple units are installed, ensure that the indoor and outdoor unit numbers correspond to the system address number on the outdoor unit control PCB, and use a magic marker or similar means which cannot be easily removed to indicate the numbers in an easily visible location on the indoor units (near the indoor unit nameplates).Example: (Outdoor) 1 . (Indoor) 1, 2... (Outdoor) 2 . (Indoor) 1, 2...


2-26-5. Setting a wired remote controller as a sub remote controller

Change the remote controller address connected on the reverse side of the remote controller switch PCB from the Main position to the Sub position.

WARNING

Fig. 2-26

To avo id an e lect r ic shock hazard,DO NOT touch any ter -mina l on the Pr in ted Ci r -cu i t Board wi th a meta l rod, ascrewdr iver edge or bare handwhen power is suppl ied.

RCU.MainRCU.CK

RCU.Sub

RCUTMNL. RCU.ADR

TIMERTMNL.

Remote controller address connector

Remote Controller (Main)

Remote Controller (Sub)Checking remote controller

Changing method for room temperature sensor (from Indoor unit to RCU)

1 On the remote controller, press + + at the same time

for more than 4 seconds.2 Set CODE No. with / (SET TEMP) button.

To display the sensor temperature: Press both and buttons on the

remote controller for more than 4 seconds together.Change the sensor address (CODE NO.) with / (SET TEMP) buttons.Select the UNIT NO. that you want to call with button. Press the button to finish service mode.

To Service TechniciansTo display the trouble history:

Press both and buttons on the remote controller for more than 4 seconds together.Change the alarm message:

/ (SET TEMP) buttons CODE NO. (New) (Old)

Press the button to finish service mode.

3 Set DATA from to with / (TIMER) button.4 Press

Finally, Press


2

2-27

XM Type (for Link Wiring)2-27. CautionThis unit may be used in a single-type refrigerant system where 1 outdoor unit is connected to 1 in-door unit, and also in a system where 1 outdoor unit is connected to multiple indoor units (maximum 4 < Double-Twin >).

This test run explanation describes primarily the procedure when using the wired remote controller.

If link wiring is used, set the outdoor unit system address to allow the combination of indoor and outdoor units to be identified. At the same time, indicate the indoor-outdoor unit combination number in a location where it can be checked easily (near the indoor unit nameplates). (This number will be required for subsequent maintenance. Refer to 2-32-2, -3, -4.)Request that the customer be present when the test run is performed. At this time, explain the operation manual and have the customer perform the actual steps.Be sure to pass the manuals and warranty certificate to the customer. Check that the 220 – 240 V AC wiring is not connected to the inter-unit control wiring connector terminal.If 220 – 240 V AC is accidentally applied, the indoor oroutdoor unit control PCB fuse will blow in order to protect the PCB. Correct the wiring connections, then disconnect the 2P connectors (blue, OC) that are connected to the PCB, and replace them with 2P connectors (brown, EMG). (Refer to the figure 2-27.)If operation is still not possible after changing the brown connectors, cut the JP003 for the indoor unit, and cut the JP007 for the outdoor unit.(Be sure to turn the power OFF before performing this work.)


Fuse 5A

CHK(2P plug)


2P connector (blue)JP003

Power PCB

Control PCB

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)


TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-27


YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

Fig. 2-28




Is system “single-type”?

Is group control with multiple outdoor units used?



(See 2-32-1) How to Set Automatic Address

Set the automatic address setting from outside unit or remote controller.

(*) Indicate (mark) the combination number. (See 2-32-3, -4)

Turn ON the indoor and outdoor power. Automatic Address


Canoperation be

started?



AutomaticAddress

(See 2-31)

Refer to “Table of Self-DiagnosticFunctions” to check the system. In addition, refer to 2-32 and correct any items that need to be corrected.


(*) Required for simultaneous-operationmulti systems and for group control.


2

2-28


(1) Turn the remote power switch ON at least 12 hours inadvance in order to energize the crank case heater.


2-30. Test Run Using the Remote Controller (1) Press and hold the remote controller button for 4

seconds or longer. Then press the button.


(3) If normal operation is not possible, a code appears on the remote controller LCD display.Refer to “Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions andCorrections” on the next page, and correct the problem.

(4) After the test run is completed, press the buttonagain. Check that “TEST” disappears from the LCDdisplay. (This remote controller includes a functionthat cancels test run mode after a 60-minute timerhas elapsed, in order to prevent continuous test runoperation.)

(5) For the test run of an inverter outdoor unit, operate thecompressors for a minimum of 10 minutes (in order tocheck for open phase).* When performing a test run using a wired remotecontroller, operation is possible without attaching thecassette-type ceiling panel.( “P09” will not be displayed.)

“TEST” appears in the LCD display during the test run.Temperature control is not possible when test run mode is engaged.(This mode places a large load on the devices. Use itonly when performing the test run.)

The outdoor unit will not operate for approximately3 minutes after the power is turned ON or after it stops operating.

NOTE


2

2-29

2-31. Table of Self-Diagnostic Functions and Corrections (XM Type)

Wired remote controller display


CauseCorrection Group connection and simultaneous-operation

multi system

Nothing is displayed Nothing is displayed

Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit correctly.Indoor unit power is not ON.

Connect the remote controller correctly.Turn ON the indoor unit power.

E 0 1 displayed

Automatic address setting has not been completed.Inter-unit control wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.Remote controller is not connected with indoor unit correctly.

Check the remote controller and inter-unit control wiring.Perform automatic address setting (See 2-32).

E 0 2 displayedOperating lampis blinking. Remote controller is not connected with indoor

unit correctly. Connect the remote controller correctly.

E 1 4 displayed Remote controller crossover wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

Check the remote controller crossover wiring.Perform automatic address setting again.

E 0 4 displayed

Standby lampis blinking.

Indoor-outdoor inter-unit wiring is not connected correctly. Connect the wiring correctly.

E 0 6 displayed Indoor-outdoor inter-unit wiring is cut or is not connected correctly.

Refer to 2-32-1 System Control, and make the correct settings.

E 1 5 displayed Indoor unit capacity is too low.Check that the total capacities of the indoor and outdoor units are appropriate.

E 1 6 displayed Indoor unit capacity is too high.

P 0 5 displayedOperation lamp andStandby lamp are blinking alternately.

Reversed phase at one of the outdoor units in the group.Insufficient gas

Check that the CT senscr is not disconnected, and make sure it is inserted.Fill up the gas appropriately.

P 0 9 displayedTimer lamp and Standby lamp are blinking alternately.

Ceiling panel connector at one of the indoor units in the group is not connected correctly.


P 1 2 displayed DC fan trouble at one of the indoor units in the group.

Check whether the fan holder is loose.Check the wiring between the DC fan and the PCB.

L 0 2 displayedL 1 3 displayed

Both the Operation lamp and Standby lamp are blinking together.

Indoor-outdoor unit type mismatch.Check that the indoor and outdoor unit types are correct.

L 0 7 displayedRemote controller crossover wiring is connected to the indoor unit, however it is set for individual operation.

Perform automatic address setting (See 2-32 ).

L 1 0 displayed Check outdoor operation with separate maintenance-use remote controller.


2

2-30

2-32. Automatic Address Setting2-32-1. Basic wiring diagram

Link wiring

A terminal plug (black) is attached to each of the outdoor unit control PCBs. At only one outdoor unit, leave the terminal plug short-circuit socket on the “Yes” side. At all the other outdoor units, change the socket (from “Yes” to “No”).

3-1 3-21-1 1-2

2-1 2-2 2-3 3-3 3-4

Fig. 2-29

Automatic address setting from the outdoor unit (XM type)

Case 1If the power can be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system, the indoor unit addresses can be set without running the compressor.

(1) Turn on the indoor and outdoor unit power for refrigerant system 1.Press and hold the automatic address setting button(black) for 1 second or longer at the outdoor unit where the power was turned ON.




(2) Next, turn ON the power only at the indoor and outdoor units in a different system. Press the auto-matic address setting button (black) on the outdoor unit.




Case 2If the power cannot be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system:The compressors must be run in order to automatically set the indoor unit addresses. Therefore perform this step after completing the refrigerant tubing work.


When setting addresses in cooling mode(2) Short-circuit the mode-change pin at the outdoor unit




(3) LED 1 and 2 blink alternately. The compressors begin running in Cooling (or Heating) mode. Communication for automatic address setting begins, using the temperature changes at the indoor units.<All indoor units are in operating status.>

Address setting is completed when the compressors stop and the LED indicators turn OFF. <Approximately 15 minutes is required for 1 system.>If address setting fails, LED 1 and 2 blink simultane-ously and the alarm contents are displayed at the remote controller.

(4) After 1 system is completed, be sure to press theautomatic address setting button (black) at the otheroutdoor units to complete automatic address setting in the same way for each system.


Refrigerant system No. 1 Refrigerant system No. 2 Refrigerant system No. 3

(Change setting to “1”) (Change setting to “2”) (Change setting to “3”)




Remote controller Remote controller


No.1


Remote controller

Indoor unit

Outdoor unit

Terminal plate 1, 2

Terminal plate 1, 2

System address rotary switch on the outdoor unit PCB

A maximum of 8 indoor units can be connected to 1 remote controller for group control.

No.2 No.3

NOTE


2

2-31

Automatic address setting using the remote cont-roller

Case 3If the power can be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system (indoor unit addresses can be set without running the compressor):

Individual system automatic address setting: Display item code “A1”.

(1) Press the remote controller timer time button and button simultaneously.(Hold for 4 seconds or longer.)

(2) Then press either the temperature setting or button.(Confirm that the item code is “A1”.)

(3) Use either the or button to select theoutdoor unit to perform automatic address setting for. Then press the button.(“R.C.1” is displayed, and automatic address setting is performed for refrigerant system 1.)When automatic address setting for system 1 is completed, the units return to normal stopped status.<Approximately 4 – 5 minutes are required.>


Case 4If the power cannot be turned ON separately for the indoor and outdoor units in each system:(The compressors must be run in order to automatically set the indoor unit addresses. Therefore perform this step after completing the refrigerant tubing work.)

All-systems automatic address setting: Display item code “AA”.

(1) Press the remote controller timer time button and button simultaneously. (Hold for 4 seconds or longer.)

(2) Next press the button.(Automatic address setting is performed in sequence for all outdoor units from No. 1 to No. 30. When automatic address setting is completed, the units return to normal stopped status.)<Approximately 15 minutes is required for each system.>


Fig. 2-30

2-32-2. Setting outdoor unit system addressesFor the basic wiring diagram (Set the system addresses: 1, 2, 3...)

ON

1 2

8 – 10 HP

LED1

FUSE (0.5A, F500)

OC (CN500, BLU)

MOV2(CN301, BLK)

MOV1(CN300, WHT)

EMG (CN502, BRN)

SILENT (CN037, WHT)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)



C2 (CN020, WHT)

C1 (CN021, WHT)

TEST (CN033, RED)


TS (CN022, RED)

63PH (CN027, WHT)

EXCT(CN030, RED)

RC P (CN039, RED)

IC002

CTL2(CN202, GRN)

CTL1(CN203, GRN)

FUSE(6.3A, F101)


LED2

MODE (CN038)


A.ADD (CN047)

C-CHK (CN035)

EEPROM

LED (D041)

Fig. 2-31

System address No.

System address 10s digit

(2P DIP switch)

System address 1s place

(Rotary switch)


Both OFF

ONON

OFF1 2

“0” setting


Both OFF

ONON

OFF1 2

“1” setting


Both OFF

ONON

OFF1 2

“2” setting


10s digit ON

ONON

OFF1 2

“1” setting


20s digit ON

ONON

OFF1 2

“1” setting


10s digit and 20sdigit ON

ONON

OFF1 2

“0” setting




System address10s 20s DIP switch

ON

OFF


2

2-32

2-32-3. Checking indoor unit addressesUse the remote controller to check the addresses of the indoor units. Press and hold the button and button for 4 seconds or longer (simple settings mode, “ALL” appears on the remote controller). Then press the button and select the indoor address.(For the system addresses of the No. 1 outdoor unit, each time the button is pressed, the address changes as follows: 1-1, 1-2, ...)The indoor unit fan operates only at the selected indoor unit. Confirm the indoor unit address. (For the system addresses of the No. 2 outdoor unit, the displayed addresses are 2-1, 2-2, ...)Press the button again to return to the normal remotecontroller mode.

Fig. 2-32


Indicate (mark) the number after automatic address setting is completed.

(1) So that the combination of each indoor unit can be easily checked when multiple units are installed, ensure that the indoor and outdoor unit numbers correspond to the system address number on the outdoor unit control PCB, and use a magic marker or similar means which cannot be easily removed to indicate the numbers in an easily visible location on the indoor units (near the indoor unit nameplates).

Example: (Outdoor) 1 – (Indoor) 1, 2... (Outdoor) 2 – (Indoor) 1, 2...


Installing the batteries(1) Press on both sides of the remote controller cover

and slide it downward to remove it.(2) Insert 2 AAA alkaline batteries. (Pay attention to the

+ and – directions.)(3) Gently insert one end of an unfolded paper clip (or

a similar object that can fit) into the Reset hole and press the reset button inside the hole and then put the cover back on.

To remove the remote controller, pull it toward you.

Fig. 2-34

Precautions for remote controller installationBefore mounting the remote controller on the wall, place the unit at the mounting position, then turn on any fluorescent lamps, press the ON/OFF button, and check that the air conditioner operates correctly.

When using the remote controller to detect the roomtemperature, observe the following precautions during installation:• Avoid locations where the remote controller will be exposed to the direct path of air blown from the air conditioner.• Avoid locations where the remote controller will be exposed to direct sunlight.• Avoid locations where the remote controller will be exposed to direct heat sources.

2-33. Caution for Pump DownPump down means refrigerant gas in the system is returned to the outdoor unit. Pump down is used when the unit is to be moved, or before servicing the refrigerant circuit.

CAUTION

This outdoor unit cannot collect more than the rated refrigerant amount as shown by the nameplate on the back.

Reset hole

Cover

Installing the Remote ControllerIf the remote controller is to be installed onto a wall or other surface for use, first place the remote controller in the location where it will be installed and press (ON / OFF).Confirm that the “signal-received” sound occurs at the indoor unit and that the A/C begins operating.

1

2

Fig. 2-33

Fasten the remote control mount with screws.

Remote control mount

Put in

Fitting the remote control in the mount.

Press

If the amount of refrigerant is more than that recommended, do not conduct a pump down. In this case use another refrigerant collecting system.


2

2-33

Caution on Pump Down (Refrigerant Recovery)

Pump down cannot be performed when the tubing length exceeds 30m. (There is a possiblilty of generating the actuation of the excessive load protection system.) In this case, collect the refrigerant by the refrigeant collecting system.

1. Stop the unit operetion (cooling heating wind direction, etc.).

2. Connect the manifold gauge to the service port of the gas tube service valve.

3. Short-circuit the PUMP pin on the outdoor unit control PCB for over 1 second.

• During the refrigerant recovery. LED1 blinks and LED2 lights up on the outdoor unit control PCB.

4. Fully close the liquid tube service valve after 2 or 3 minutes. Pump down will start.

5. When the manifold gauge reduces to 0.2 - 0.1MPa. fully close the gas tube service valve. Then again short-circuit the PUMP pin (CN048). Refrigerant recovery is finished.• If operation is continued for over 10 minutes, the

unit stops even if the refrigerant recovery is not completed. Check the liquid tube service valve closed.

• When the PUMP pin (CN048) is shorted again during refrigerant recovery the unit stops.

* For protection of the compressor do not drive until the unit tubing side becomes negative pressure.

PUMP pin (CN048) is located on the outdoor PCB as shown.

CAUTION

Pay much attention to the fan of the out-door unit as there is danger of injury dur-ing operation.

• Refrigerant recovery will start and the unit starts driving.

• Remote control display shows blinks.

NOTE


3-1

3

3. ELECTRICAL DATA

3-1. Indoor Units (Electric Wiring Diagram, Schematic Diagram) ................................. 3-24-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type ........................................................................................... 3-2Wall-Mounted Type ................................................................................................................................. 3-5Ceiling-Mounted Type ............................................................................................................................. 3-9Concealed-Duct Type .............................................................................................................................. 3-11Concealed-Duct High-Static Pressure Type ............................................................................................ 3-19

3-2. Outdoor Units (Electric Wiring Diagram, Schematic Diagram) .............................. 3-23


3-2

3

3-1. Indoor Units

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XDR184 / 254 / 364 / 484GH56 (A/B) SPW-X185 / 255 / 365 / 485HElectric Wiring Diagram


3-3

3

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XDR184 / 254 / 364 / 484GH56 (A/B) SPW-X185 / 255 / 365 / 485HSchematic Diagram

3-1. Indoor Units


3-4

3

3-1. Indoor Units

4-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed Type SPW-XM185HElectric Wiring Diagram


3-5

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Wall-Mounted Type SPW-KR184GH56Electric Wiring Diagram


3-6

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Wall-Mounted Type SPW-KR184GH56Schematic Diagram


3-7

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Wall-Mounted Type SPW-KR254GH56Electric Wiring Diagram


3-8

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Wall-Mounted Type SPW-KR254GH56Schematic Diagram


3-9

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Ceiling-Mounted Type SPW-TDR184 / 254 / 364 / 484GH56 (A/B) SPW-T185 / 255 / 365 / 485HElectric Wiring Diagram


3-10

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Ceiling-Mounted Type SPW-TDR184 / 254 / 364 / 484GH56 (A/B) SPW-T185 / 255 / 365 / 485HSchematic Diagram


3-11

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184 / 254 / 364 / 484GH56 (A/B)Electric Wiring Diagram


3-12

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184 / 254 / 364 / 484GH56 (A/B)Schematic Diagram


3-13

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-U185 / 255 / 365 / 485HElectric Wiring Diagram


3-14

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-U185 / 255 / 365 / 485HSchematic Diagram


3-15

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184 / 254 / 364 / 484SH56B SPW-U185 / 255 / 365 / 485SHTElectric Wiring Diagram


3-16

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-UR184 / 254 / 364 / 484SH56B SPW-U185 / 255 / 365 / 485SHTSchematic Diagram


3-17

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-US185HElectric Wiring Diagram


3-18

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct Type SPW-US185HSchematic Diagram


3-19

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct High-Static Pressure Type SPW-D705HElectric Wiring Diagram


3-20

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Schematic DiagramConcealed-Duct High-Static Pressure Type SPW-D705H


3-21

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Concealed-Duct High-Static Pressure Type SPW-D905HElectric Wiring Diagram


3-22

3

3-1. Indoor Units

Schematic DiagramConcealed-Duct High-Static Pressure Type SPW-D905H


3-23

3

3-2. Outdoor Units

Electric Wiring Diagram SPW-C706 / 906VH8


3-24

3

3-2. Outdoor Units

Schematic Diagram SPW-C706 / 906VH8


4-1

4

4. PROCESS AND FUNCTIONS

4-1. Control Functions ....................................................................................................... 4-2

4-2. Outdoor Unit Control PCB ......................................................................................... 4-8

4-3. Indoor Unit Control PCB Switches and Functions .................................................. 4-11


4-2

4

4-1. Control Functions

1. Indoor Air Temprature Control

The thermostat is switched on and off in accordance with T shown below.

The frequency of the compressor's inverter is limited by either of the following controls depending on whether the cooling or heating mode is in operation.

By the control method, not only the thermostat is switched on and off, as explained above section " 1. Indoor air Temperature Control ", but also the frequency of the compressor's inverter is controlled in accordance with T and fluctuations in indoor air temperature. Inverter frequency is controlled as follows:

The fluctuations of the compressor inverter frequency adjustments are calculated taking into account not only T, but also-fluctuations in indoor air temperature.

*

* Shift TemperatureOnly valid during heating operation. Set at 0 during cooling operation.The settings at factory shipment during heating operation are as follows:

2. Compressor Frequency Control

1) Indoor Air Temperature Control

= (Indoor air temperature) - (Temperature set with the remote controller)T

In the body thermostat mode (setting at factory shipment)

Indoor air temperature = (Body sensor) - (Shift temperature *)

In the remote controller thermostat mode Indoor air temperature = (Remote controller sensor)

When T is high (not yet reached the temperature set with the remote controller).

Controlled so that the inverter frequency is increased.

When T is low (approximately +1.0 or less in the cooling mode or approximately -1.0 or more in the heating mode).

Controlled so that the inverter frequency is decreased or kept.

When the indoor air temperature is rising in the cooling mode and dropping in the heating mode.

Controlled so that the inverter frequency is increased.

When the indoor air temperature is dropping in the cooling mode and rising in the heating mode.

Controlled so that the inverter frequency is decreased.

Wall-Mounted type : 2Floor Standing type : 0All other types (4-way types, Concealed types, etc.) : 4

This function acts as the coefficient for adjusting differences in temperature caused by the height of the living space from the floor to the ceiling (the temperature at ceiling height is higher) during heating operation. The setting can be modified between 0 and 6 with mode [06] (Simple Settings Function) on the remote controller. (Refer to the section " 7. REMOTE CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS SECTION ")

(1) Once the thermostat has been switched on, it cannot be switched off again by indoor air temperature control for a period of 10 minutes.

(2) Once the thermostat has been switched off, it cannot be switched on again for a period of 3 minutes.(3) The thermostat will not be switched off by indoor air temperature control and operations will continue during

the test operation mode.

Cooling Mode Heating Mode

: Thermostat ON

: Thermostat OFF

Cooling Mode :Indoor air temperature controlMaximum and minimum frequency controlCurrent release controlCooling high-load prevention controlCooling freeze prevention controlDischarge temperature control

Heating Mode :Indoor air temperature controlMaximum and minimum frequency controlCurrent release controlHeating high-load prevention controlDischarge temperature control

T+ 1.0

- 1.0

0

T+ 1.0

- 1.0

0


4-3

4

2) Maximum and Minimum Frequency Control

The compressor's inverter frequency is controlled in accordance with the model and operation mode. The maximum and minimum frequencies for each model are shown in the chart below.

3) Current Release Control

The inverter frequency is controlled so that the current value for the inverter compressor is less than the figure listed in the chart below only in the cooling mode in order to prevent abnormal increases in the inverter circuit located within the outdoor unit's electrical box.

4) Cooling High-Load Prevention Control

There are cases in which frequency is limited with other control functions depending on operational conditions, so operations are not always carried out in accordance with the maximum frequencies listed below.

*

* There are cases in which the frequency is set at 33.0Hz to protect the compressor in accordance with outdoor air temperature and indoor loads.

706 Model 906 Model

91.2 HzMaximum Frequency

Cooling

Heating Hz96.0

Hz25.0 *Minimum Frequency

Cooling

Heating Hz

80.0 Hz

85.0 Hz

25.0 * Hz

25.0 * Hz25.0 *

TO 706 and 906 Models

Cooling Mode

(1)

Diagram of Current Release Control with Outdoor Air Temperature

TO (Outdoor Air Temperature)

ls a

ls b

ls c

ls dls

AB

CDEF

GH

Current release control with primary current : The limited values are modified in accordance with outdoor air temperature.

(2) Current release control with secondary current : Values are fixed regardless of outdoor air temperature.

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

39

40

42

43

44

45

47

48

706 Model

Is d

Is c

Is b

Is a

10.6

8.8

7.5

6.3

Current value

906 Model

12.8

10.5

9.0

7.5

Current value

Is 12.5 15.0

d

c

b

a

48

52

54

55

706 Model

47

50

52

53

906 Model

706 Model 906 Model

I (A) 14.5 15.5

This control is performed to limit the inverter frequency in order to restrict abnormal increases in pressure and high-load operations in the cooling mode. In accordance with the temperature of the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensors (C1, C2), such controls are performed as halting the operations of the indoor unit, decreasing the inverter frequency and restricting its increase, etc. If the temperature max (C1, C2) exceeds 64 , operations of the indoor unit are halted and then restarted 3 minutes later. If this start/stop activity is repeated four times consecutively, alarm "P20" (cooling high-load error) occurs.

max. (C2, C1)

Outdoor unit operations halted

Frequency decreased

Frequency increases prevented

Frequency increased slower than normal

Normal operations (no control)

a

64

bc

d


4-4

4

5) Heating High-Load Prevention Control

The following control is performed in the heating mode in accordance with the indoor heat exchanger temperature max (E1, E2). (See the chart below.)

During the increase of temperature max (E1, E2) after the compressor is switched on, the temperature for entering the "M" zone for the first time is set at 52 .The temperature for entering the "M" zone is reset to 52 after the temperature max (E1, E2) dropped less than 30 .

*

(1)

I

H

K (operating frequency increase prevention zone)

A

J

The operational frequency of the compressor is decreased when the temperature enters the "M" zone. The operation frequency is modified every 30 seconds while the temperature remains in this zone (the thermostat is switched off if it continues for 2 minutes).

(2) The "N" zone is the area in which operation frequency increases are prevented.(3) The operational frequency returns to normal control when the detected temperature enters the "L" zone.

6) Cooling Freeze Prevention Control

The following control is performed during cooling operations (including dehumidifying operation), in accordance with whichever of the indoor heat exchanger temperatures (E1 or E2) is lower. (See the chart below.)

(1) If the temperature remains in the "J" zone (decreasing operation frequency and thermostat OFF zone) for 6 minutes, the operating frequency of the compressor is decreased. The operation frequency is amended every 30 seconds as long as the temperature is in this zone.

(2) If the temperature is in the "K" zone (operating frequency increase prevention zone), the operating frequency of the compressor is maintained.

(4) If the temperature is in the "I" zone (normal operation zone), normal operations are performed.

(3) If the temperature is in the "H" zone (operating frequency restriction zone) and the outdoor air temperature is less than 32 , the maximum operating frequency of the compressor is limited in accordance with the indoor unit fan speed.

(5) If the temperature is continuously in the "J" zone with the compressor's operating frequency reaches "0", then temperature A, which is temperature for changing from the "J" zone to the "H" zone, is raised from 5 to 8 , and operation continues with the thermostat off until the temperature enters the "H" zone.

max. (E1, E2)

Thermostat OFF

58

53(52)

48L

M

N (operational frequency increase prevention zone)( * )

E1 (or E2)

22

17

5

2


4-5

4

7) Discharge Temperature Control

The following control is performed to prevent the discharge temperature from rising abnormally in order to protect the inverter compressor. In accordance with the temperature of the discharge sensor TD, such controls are performed as to limiting the increase of inverter frequency, decreasing it or halting operation of the compressor.

If the discharge temperature exceeds 115 , operations of the compressor are halted and then restarted 3 minutes later.If this start/stop activity is repeated 4 times consecutively, the alarm "P03" (abnormal discharge temperature) occurs.

*

Frequency increased slower than usual

Normal (no control)

Outdoor unit operation halted

Frequency decreased

Frequency increases prevented

8) Defrosting Control

This control function removes frost that has adhered to the outdoor heat exchanger during the heating operation.The control is performed to prevent the deterioration of the heating capabilities attributed to the adherence of frost, and to prevent the crack or crush of pipes attributed to the accretion of ice.The following control is performed in accordance with the external temperature and the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1).

Yes (detected)

No

Yes (elapsed)

Yes (satisfied)

Overall Flow Chart of Defrosting Control

TD (discharge)

115

105100

95

80

Has more than 25 minutes (heating mask time) elapsed?

Have the conditions for ending defrosting been satisfied?

Has frost adherence been detected?

Defrosting operations commenced

Heating operation resumed

Normal heating operation

No

No

Heating operation continued

Heating operation continued

Defrosting operation continued

Frost adherence detectionIf the following conditions are satisfied during heating operations, it is regarded as "frost adherence is detected".Frost adherence detection is performed in accordance with the outdoor air temperature (TO) and the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1).

However, frost adherence detection is not performed for the first 15 minutes of compressor operations in the normal heating mode.

*

With the outdoor air temperature (TO) being -13 or above, the frost adherence condition shown below are satisfied for whether 3 consecutive minutes or a total of 60 intermittent minutes, or the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1) remains -18 or below for 20 consecutive seconds.

(a)

With the outdoor air temperature (TO) being less than -13 , the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1) remains less than or equal to outdoor air temperature (TO) - 5 for 20 consecutive seconds.

(b)

With the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1) being less than -3 , a total of 90 minutes has elapsed (defrosting carried out periodically in accordance with the time).

(c)

Frost adherence detection conditions

Outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1) (°C)

Outdoor air temperature (TO) (°C)-13 0

Y

10

-3-8

-19.4

X

Defrosting condition zone


4-6

4

Heating Mask TimeThis refers to the shortest time that heating operations must be performed without defrosting operations being executed.The mask time for this model is 25 minutes.

Ending defrosting conditions

Defrosting operations will not be commenced until the defrosting mask time has elapsed, even if frost adherence has been detected.

*

Ending DefrostingDefrosting operations are ended when the following conditions are aligned.

When the temperature of the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1) is 12 or higher.(a)When the temperature of the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1) is 7 or higher for 60 consecutive seconds.

(b)

The appropriate rotations per minute for the outdoor unit fan are determined in accordance with the outdoor air temperature and the frequency of the compressor inverter.The outdoor unit fan step is controlled between a range of W1 (Step 1) and WD (Step 14).

When defrosting has been initiated for 10 minutes.(c)

9) Outdoor Unit Fan Control

(1) Cooling Mode

The appropriate rotations per minute for the outdoor unit fan are determined in accordance with the outdoor air temperature and the frequency of the compressor inverter.The outdoor unit fan step is controlled between a range of W1 (Step 1) and WE (Step 15).* However, the outdoor unit fan is halted (Step 0) when defrosting is being carried out.

(2) Heating Mode

10) Outdoor Unit's Electrical Expansion Valve Control

The electrical expansion valve controls the amount of refrigerant that is allowed to flow in accordance with the operation status.The valve is adjusted in accordance with the discharge temperature (TD), the outdoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1), the suction temperature sensor (TS), and the indoor unit's heat exchanger temperature sensors (E1 and E2.)

Controlled so that the section temperature (TS) - indoor heat exchange temperature minimum (E1 and E2) is between 1 and 5 under normal conditions.There are cases where the aperture opens wider than usual if the discharge temperature increases.

(1) Cooling Mode

Controlled so that the section temperature (TS) - outdoor heat exchange temperature (C1) is between 1 and 5 under normal conditions.There are cases where the aperture opens wider than usual if the discharge temperature increases.

(2) Heating Mode

11) Solenoid valve Control

The solenoid valve is switched on when normal operations have been halted and before and after defrosting operations in order to stabilize differences between refrigerant pressure (reduced pressure).There are also cases in which it is switched on at the start of operations when the outdoor air temperature is low in order to stabilize the behavior of the oil.

It is basically kept off, but there are cases when it is switched on for brief periods at the start of operations when the outdoor air temperature is low.

(1) Normal Operations Mode

It is switched on for approximately 1 minute before and after defrosting operations.(2) Defrosting (Heating) Operations

Switched on for a maximum of 30 minutes in order to stabilize pressure before and after compressor operations.

(3) When Operations are Halted


4-7

4

12) Demand Control

Demand input from an external source is carried out from the outdoor unit EXCT (CN030) PCB or the outdoor unit's serial/parallel I/O (optional).

(1) Demand via External Input

Demand control is carried out proportionally with the normal settings from the outdoor unit without any external input.

(2) Demand Control with No External Input

* The operational current is restricted to either A% or B% as a general indicator during demand input.

There are two styles of demand operations available as methods of restraining power consumption.

13) Switching to Silent Mode Setup

Two silent mode settings are available: 50dB (A) and 45dB (A).This setting can be amended with the detailed settings on the outdoor maintenance remote controller.

Demand control with EXCT input

Item code "21" : 0 (Setting at shipment) Sets silent mode 45dB (A).Item code "21" : 1 Sets silent mode 50dB (A)

A% and B% can be amended in calibrations of 5% between 70% and 100% with the outdoor unit's maintenance remote controller.For details on how to amend the parameters, see the chapter on the outdoor maintenance remote controller, (Refer to the section "6-6. Settings Modes : Setting the Outdoor Unit EEPROM").

Amendments can be made in calibrations of 5% between 70% and 100%.Refer to the section "6-6. Settings Modes : Setting the Outdoor Unit EEPROM" for the outdoor maintenance remote controller for details on how to amend the parameters.Parameters are amended with item code "52" (current control level).

A% value amendments: Parameters are amended with item code "50" (demand 1).B% value amendments: Parameters are amended with item code "51" (demand 2).

1

1

0

0

2P and 3P

Short-circuitControl (range of operations)

1

0

1

0

Control OFF

Rated current restricted to B% (B% = 70% at factory shipment)

Rated current restricted to A% (A% = 100% at factory shipment)

No control

1P and 3P


4-8

4

4-2. Outdoor Unit Control PCB(1) Layout Diagram (CR-C906VH8)

Fuse (F101) RC_P (CN039)

LED2 LED1 MODE(CN038)

R.C.ADDS002

S003 EEPROM memory IC

TEST(CN033)

EXCT (CN030)

SILENT (CN037)

PUMP DOWN (CN048)

Sensor at upper sideof heat exchanger(C2)

Sensor at lower sideof heat exchanger(C1)

A.ADD (CN047)

Suction temp. (TS)Outdoor air temp. (TO)Comp. discharge temp. (TD)


4-9

4

4-2. Outdoor Unit Control PCB (CR-C906VH8)(2) Explanation of Functions

Auto Address Pin(CN047)

2P (white): Automatic address setting switchIf the system address switch (S002: set to 0 at time of shipment) setting is other than (central control), press this switch once to automatically set the addresses at all indoor units which are in the same system, and are connected to that outdoor unit. During automatic address setting, the 2 LEDs (red) on the outdoor unit control PCB blink alternately. (Pressing this switch again stops automatic address setting.)

“0”

If automatic address setting is currently in progress at another system that is subject to central control, only LED 1 on the outdoor unit control PCB blinks to indicate that automatic address setting is in progress at another unit. If automatic address setting is in progress at another unit, automatic address setting cannot be made at this unit, even if S001 is pressed.

After the power is turned ON, automatic address setting will not be functioned for over 1 minute and 30 seconds.

*

S002 Rotary switch (10 positions, black): System address setting switchThis switch is set to 0 (1 system control) at the time of shipment. However the address for each system must be set when multiple systems are controlled or when central control is used. (Figure 1)

If the system address is set to 0, automatic address setting is started when the power is turned ON. Therefore it is not necessary to use switch SW01 and perform automatic address setting in the case of single or simultaneous-operation multi control of a single system.

When using central control for multiple systems, a maximum of 30 systems (maximum 64 units) can be connected. In the case of group control or central control, set the system address to a setting other than 0 (1 or above).

If the number of systems is greater than 9, this switch can be used in combination with DIP switch S003 to set up to 30 systems. The setting can be made as high as 39, however all settings above 30 are handled as 30 for control. (For details, refer to Table 4-1.)

If system addresses are duplicated (the same address exists more than once), LED 1 on the outdoor unit control PCB lights up, and alarm “L04” is displayed on the remote controller.

S003 DIP switch (2P, blue): System address 10s-digit and 20s-digit place setting switchWhen setting 10 systems or more, set this switch in combination with S002.For 10 – 19 systems, set 1P (10s-digit place) to ON.For 20 – 29 systems, set 2P (20s-digit place) to ON, and set 1P (10s-digit place) to OFF.For 30 systems, set both 1P (10s-digit place) and 2P (20s-digit place) to ON. (For details, refer to Table 4-1.)

PUMP DOWN Pin(CN048)

PUMP DOWN Pin (2P, white)Press this switch to perform refrigerant recovery control using cooling operation.The indoor unit fan will operate at HIGH and 55 Hz for a maximum of 10 minutes. When refrigerant recovery is completed, close the valves and press this switch to stop the operation.

Test (CN033) 2P plug (red): Pin used for PCB inspection at the factory

EXCT (CN030) 3P plug (red): Can be used for demand control

Note 1:The maximum length of the wiring between the outdoor unit PCB and the relay is 2 m.

The operating ranges are shown in the table.2P and 3P 1P and 3P

Operating range

0011

0101

No limit100% at shipment70% at shipment

OFF

Short-circuited

Lead wire with 3P plug (special-order part : 623-161-2098)Relay (field supply) contact input specifications : minimum compatible load 0.1mA

21

3

EXCTplug (CN030)


Relay (field supply)

Demand input 2

21

3Demand input 1


4-10

4

Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor

Quiet mode plug(CN037)

2P plug (white): Enables operation in quiet mode.The outdoor unit fan and compressor frequencies are subject to limits during operation.Low-noise operation is enabled when the relay is turned ON. (Non-voltage contact "a" )

Example of wiring

1

CN40Quiet mode

Relay (field supply) Power

External contact (timer input, etc.: field supply)


Note 2: The maximum length of the wiring between the outdoor unit PCB and the relay is 2 m.Lead wire with 2P plug (special-order part: 623-161-2098)Relay, (field supply) contact input specifications: DC 5 V, 0.5 mA (Recommended relay: Fuji Electric HH62SW, compatible with micro contacts)Use a commercially available timer (such as the Omron H5 daily time switch).

Table 4-1. Method of System Address Setting[S002 (rotary, black), S003 (2P DIP switch, blue)]

1

123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930

0

123456789012345678901234567890

OFF

OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONONONONONONONOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFON

OFF

OFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFONONONONONONONONONONON

2P (20s-digit place)Outdoor system

address No.

1 system only

Centralcontrol

S002 setting(system address switch)

S003 setting

1P (10s-digit place) System controller

Fig. 1

1

2 2

Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor

S-LINKadaptor

Remote controller


4-11

4

4-3. Indoor Unit Control PCB Switches and Functions[Indoor unit control PCB]

T10 (CN61): 6P plug (YEL) / Used for remote control operation. (Refer to the Remote Control Section.)

Control items: (1) Start/stop input(3) Start signal output

(2) Remote controller prohibit input(4) Alarm signal output

EXCT (CN73): 2P plug (RED) / Can be used for demand control. When input is present, forces the unit to operate with the thermostat OFF.

DISP (CN72): 2P plug (WHT) / Short-circuiting this plug allows operation to be controlled by the remote controller even when an outdoor unit is not connected. (In this case, alarm “E04,” which indicates trouble in the serial communication between the indoor and outdoor unit, does not occur.)

CHK: 2P plug (WHT) / Test pin. Short-circuiting this pin allows the indoor FM (H fan speed), drain pump, fl ap motor (F1 position), and electronic expansion valve full-open position to be checked.However this function turns OFF if the indoor unit protection mechanism is activated.The components will operate even if the remote controller and outdoor unit are not connected, however the remote control cannot be used for control even if it is connected. This plug can be used for short-term tests.

JP1 (J01): Jumper wire / Allows selection of the T10 terminal start/stop signal. (Refer to the Remote Control Section.)Setting at time of shipment: Pulse signalJumper wire cut: Static signal (continuous signal)

Fan drive: 2P plug (WHT) / This terminal sends the signal to the ventilation fan when a commercially available ventilation fan is operated by the FAN button on the wired remote controller. (Refer to the Remote Control Section.) Use a ventilation fan which can accept the no-voltage contact A signal as the external input signal.

Filter: 2P (WHT) / This terminal is used to connect contact input from the differential-pressure switch, used to detect fi lter clogging. When the contact is ON, “FILTER” appears on the display of the wired remote controller.

Power LED: LED (RED) / Illuminates when the power is ON. Flashes when there is trouble with the EEPROM (IC10, IC010: nonvolatile memory).

EEPROM (IC10): Nonvolatile memory / Used to store model information and other data. When replacing the PCB, remove the EEPROM from the old PCB and install it onto the new PCB. If there is IC trouble, replace with a new IC (provided with the servicing PCB), and set the necessary information using the wired remote controller. (For the setting procedure, refer to the servicing technical materials.)

GRL (CN20): For AC fan motor (CR-UXRP71B-B) – 3P (YEL)

For DC fan motor (CR-SXRP56B-B) – 5P (BLU)

K Type

1(L)2(N) 41 2 3 4 5

Power supply


5P terminal board

5 1(L)2(N)Power supply U1


U2Remote controller

8P terminal board

R1 R21 2 U1 U2 R1 R2

U Type

1(L) 2(N)

Power supply

U1


U2

Remote controller

R1 R2

X, T, D Type

7P terminal board

L

6P terminal board

XM, US Type

POWERSUPPLY UNIT

CONTROLLINE

REMOTECONTROLLINE

N U1 U2 R1 R2

There are 5P, 6P, 7P and 8P control PCB types for indoor units.


4-12

4

4-3. Indoor Unit Control PCB Switches and Functions

For AC Fan Motor (CR-UXRP71B-B)

For DC Fan Motor (CR-SXRP56B-B)

EMG (CN044)

DISP (CN072)

CHK (CN071)

T10 (CN061)

EXCT (CN073) GRL (CN020)

JP001

FAN DRIVE (CN032)FILTER (CN070)

POWER LED (D002)

OC (CN040)EEPROM (IC010)

OPTION (CN060)

VARISTOR (VA100)

EEPROM (IC010)

OPTION(CN060)

CHK(CN062)

JP001FILTER(CN070)

EXCT(CN073)

FAN DRIVE(CN032)

POWER LED (D002)

DISP(CN063)

T10(CN061)

GRL(CN020)

VARISTOR(VA100)

EMG(CN044)

OC(CN040)


4-13

4

For DC Fan Motor (CR-KRP50A)

VARISTOR (VA002)

FAN DRIVE (CN017)OPTION (CN014)

T10 (CN015)

JP001

EXCT (CN009)

FILTER (CN012)

EEPROM (IC002)EMG (CN018)

OC (CN019)

DISP (CN010)

CHK (CN011)

For DC Fan Motor (CR-KRP80A)

VARISTOR (VA002)

FAN DRIVE (CN017)OPTION (CN014)

T10 (CN015)

JP001

EXCT (CN009)

FILTER (CN012)

EEPROM (IC002)EMG (CN018)

OC (CN019)

DISP (CN010)

CHK (CN011)


5-1

5

5. SERVICE PROCEDURES

5-1. Meaning of Alarm Messages ..................................................................................... 5-2

5-2. Contents of LED Display on the Outdoor Unit Control PCB .................................. 5-4

5-3. Symptoms and Parts to Inspect ............................................................................... 5-5

5-4. Details of Alarm Messages ....................................................................................... 5-8

5-5. Table of Thermistor Characteristics ......................................................................... 5-14

5-6. How to Remove the Compressor ............................................................................. 5-15

5-7. How to Remove the Electrical Component Box ...................................................... 5-16


5-2

5

5-1. Meaning of Alarm Messages

1. Contents of the alarm display on the remote controller

Remote controller is detecting error signal from indoor unit

E01

E02

E10

E11

E14

E03

E08

E09

E04

E05

E06

E07

E15

E16

E20

E17

E18

E31

L01

L02

L03

L04

L07

L08

L09

L10

L11

L13

Indoor unit is detecting error signal from remote controller (and system controller)

Error in receiving serial communication signal(Signal from main indoor unit in case of group control)

Auto address is not completed

Outdoor system address, indoor system address, or indoor unit individual/main/sub setting is not set (Automatic address setting is not completed)

Error in transmitting serial communication signal

Setting error Indoor unit address setting is duplicated

Remote controller setting is duplicated

Communications error between the DC fan and the driver.

Error in transmitting serial communications signal

Error in receiving serial communications signal


Indoor unit is detecting error signaled from signal option

Setting error Main unit duplication in simultaneous-operation multi control (detected by outdoor unit)

Indoor unit is detecting error signaled from outdoor unit

Outdoor unit is detecting error signaled from indoorunit

Automatic address setting

Miswiring

failed

An indoor unit detected trouble in the signal from another indoor unit

Communications trouble between units

Setting errorMis-setting

Continued


Indoor unit capacity too low

Indoor unit capacity too high

No indoor units connected

E22Faulty connection between indoor and outdoor units or missing phase in the outdoor unit power supply.


Communications failure with MDC

Indoor unit group settings error

Indoor/outdoor unit type mismatch

Main unit duplication in group control (detected by indoor unit)

Outdoor unit address duplication (system address)

Group wiring connected for independent indoor unit

Address not set or group not set

Indoor unit capacity not set

Outdoor unit capacity not set or setting error

Miswiring in group control wiring

Indoor unit type setting error (capacity)


Error in receiving serial communications signal (including unit quantity verification failure)

Simultaneously

Simultaneously

Simultaneously

Simultaneously

Serial commu-nication errorsMis-setting

Display

Wireless remote

controller Lamp display

ON:

Op

erat

ion

Tim

er

Pre

par

ing

Blinking: OFF:

Possible cause of malfunction


5-3

5

Display

Wireless remote

controller Lamp display

Pre

par

ing

P09

P01

P10

P12

P03

P05

P15

P19

P20

P22

P26

P29

P31

H01

F01

F02

F10

F04

F06

F07

F08

F12

F29

Ceiling panel connection failure

Indoor protection Fan protective thermostat

Float switch

DC fan error.

Discharge temperature trouble

Open phase detected, AC power trouble

No gas

4-way valve locked

High cooling load

Outdoor fan trouble

Inverter compressor trouble (HIC PCB)

Inverter compressor trouble (MDC)

Simultaneous-operation multi control trouble

Compressor current failure (overload)

Indoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (E1)

Indoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (E2)

Indoor temperature sensor

Discharge temperature (TD)

Outdoor heat exchanger temperature (C1)

Outdoor heat exchanger temperature (C2)

Outdoor air temperature (TO)

Intake temperature (TS)

Indoor EEPROM error

Outdoor protection

Thermistor open circuitShort circuit (indoor)

Thermistor open circuitShort circuit (outdoor)

Activation of protective device

Thermistorfault

Alter.

Simul.

Simul.

Alter.

Alternately

Outdoor EEPROM error F31

ON:

Op

erat

ion

Tim

er

Blinking: OFF:

Possible cause of malfunction

Alter.


5-4

5

5-2. Contents of LED Display on the Outdoor Unit Control PCB

Power ON sequence1. No communication from indoor units in system

2. Communication received from 1 or more indoor units in system

3. Regular communication OK (Capacity and unit quantity match)

If it is not possible to advance to 3, repeats 1 2.At 3, changes to normal control.

P03

Normal operation

Pre-trip (insufficient gas)

Pre-trip (P20)

Pre-trip (other)

Automatic address setting in progress

Automatic address setting alarm (E15)

Automatic address setting alarm (E20)

Automatic address setting alarm (Other than E15 and E20)

Note: This table shows examples of alarms. Other type of alarms may also be displayed.

(0.25/0.75)

(0.75/0.25)

EEPROM error (F31)

Blinking alternately

Blinking simultaneously



AlarmLED 1 blinks M times, and then LED 2 blinks N times.The cycle then repeats.

M = 2: P alarm 6: L alarmN = Alarm No. * Refer to “Examples of alarm display” below.

3: H alarm 4: E alarm 5: F alarm

Alternate blinking during alarms

Insufficient gas indicator

(0.25/0.75)

(0.75/0.25)

(0.25/0.75)

(0.75/0.25)

Refrigerant recovery mode

Automatic address setting

Displayed during automatic address setting 1 and initial communication. After these are completed, alarm F31 is displayed.

P03

P04

P05

P31

H01

H02

H03

E04

F07

L13

( " )

( " )

( " )

( " )

(Blinks 3 times)

( " )

( " )

(Blinks 4 times)

(Blinks 5 times)

(Blinks 6 times)

(Blinks 3 times)

P02 ( Blinks 2 times ) (Blinks 2 times)

(Blinks 4 times)

(Blinks 5 times)

(Blinks 31 times)

(Blinks 1 times)

(Blinks 2 times)

(Blinks 3 times)

(Blinks 4 times)

(Blinks 7 times)

(Blinks 13 times)

Alarm / Display LED 1 Alternately LED 2

ON:

:

:

LED 1 LED 2 Remarks

OFF

Examples of alarm display (other than E15, E16, and E20)

Blinking (0.25/0.75) indicates that the lamp illuminates for 0.25 seconds, and then is OFF for 0.75 seconds. Unless otherwise indicated, the blinking is (0.5/0.5).


5-5

5

5-3. Symptoms and Parts to Inspect

Judgement conditionsEliminating

condition of alarm

P03

P05

P15

P19

P20

P22

P26

Remote controller

alarm display

Alarm contents Judgement and correction

Abnormal discharge temperature error.

Stops when temp. exceeds

Alarm output on 4 pre-trips.

Recovery at restart

Recovery at restart

Recovery at restart

Recovery at restart

Recovery at restart

Recovery at restart

Recovery at restart

Temperature dropped

1. Check refrigerant cycle (gas leak).

2. Trouble with electronic expansion valve.

3. Check discharge temperature sensor (TD).

Missing phase detected. (CT disconnected or AC power supply error)

The current value transmitted from the microcomputer on the outdoor unit control substrate is low.When no AC power input for more than 3 minutes: Pre-trip 5 times.

1. Check R/S/T power supply.2. Check HIC circuit.3. Check outdoor unit control

PCB.

1. Check refrigerant cycle (gas leak).

2. Trouble with electronic expansion valve.

3. Check outdoor unit valve opening.

Insufficient gas level detected.

When the above has continued for 1 minute.

4-way valve locked trouble.

The indoor unit heat exchanger temperature drops even though the compressor is switched on during the heating mode.[min(E1,E2)] is 10 or lower.The indoor unit heat exchanger temperature rises even though the compressor is switched on during the cooling mode.E2 is 50 or higherPre-trip 2 times

1. Check 4-way valve.2. Check 4-way valve wiring.3. Check outdoor unit control

PCB.

High-pressure protection error caused by cooling high-load max (C1, C2) temperature.

Halted if the temperature exceeds 64 . Error output on 4 consecutive pre-trips.

1. Overload operation of refrigerant cycle.

2. Check outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature sensor C1 and C2.

Outdoor unit fan motor trouble.

Inverter stops after alarm is detected. Pre-trip 4 times

1. Position detection trouble.2. Outdoor unit fan motor

over-current Protection circuit is activated.

Check outdoor unit control PCB.Refer to outdoor unit fan judgement methods.

Inverter protector circuit was activated.

HIC temperature protection

G-Tr short-circuit within the HIC circuit.(Short time / 0.8 seconds or less)

Inverter stops after alarm is detected. Alarm is output when inverter stops (pre-trip) consecutively 4 times.

1. Stops immediately even when operations restarted.

Layer short on the compressor

2. Check HIC circuit.Wiring trouble

115 .Discharge temp. detected at or above the specified value.

Judged after 5 minutes had elapsed since the compressor was switched on.

Inverter protection circuit was activated, or lock was detected at outdoor unit fan motor.

3. Heat sink and PCB (HIC)Contact trouble

Discharge temperature is 100 or higher.Electronic expansion valve is at Step 960.The current value from the MDC is 6.0A (three-phase) / 3.5A (single-phase) or less.


5-6

5

Judgement conditions

P29

F04

F06

F07

Alarm contents Judgement and correction

Recovery at restartError in current detection circuit.

AC current value is high, even while compressor is halted.

Inverter halted after alarm detected.Alarm output on 4 consecutive (pre-trips.)

1. Stops immediately even when operations restarted.

Layer short on the compressor

2. Check HIC circuitWiring trouble

Disconnection, open circuit or short circuit in discharge temperature sensor (TD)

Sensor detection error

(Open circuit)

(90 or more after 60 minutes has elapsed since the compressor was halted.)

Automatic recovery

Automatic recovery

Automatic recovery

1. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).

2. Check outdoor unit control PCB.

Disconnection, open circuit or short circuit in outdoor unit heat exchanger temp. sensor (C1)

Open circuit or short circuit.

Open circuit or short circuit

1. Check outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature sensor (C1).


Disconnection, open circuit or short circuit in outdoor unit heat exchanger temp. sensor (C2)

1. Check outdoor unit heat exchanger temp. sensor (C2).


Remote controller

alarm display

F08 Disconnection, open circuit or short circuit in outdoor air temp. sensor (TO)

Open circuit or short circuit Automatic recovery 1. Check outdoor air temp. sensor (TO).


F12 Open circuit or short circuit Automatic recoveryDisconnection, open circuit or short circuit in suction temp. sensor (TS)

1. Check suction temp. sensor (TS).


F31 Reading/writing failure Power reset recovery

EEPROM trouble 1. Check EEPROM (IC007).2. Check outdoor unit control

PCB.

L02 Indoor and outdoor units incompatible(PAC-i, ECO-i, GHP)

Indoor unit judged incompatible with the outdoor unit type.

Power reset recovery

1. Check indoor unit EEPROM.2. Check indoor unit control

PCB.

L04 Automatic recoverySettings failure Duplicated outdoor unit address (system address)

1. Check outdoor unit system address.

2. Check inter-unit control wiring.

L07 Settings failure Group control wiring exists in an individually-controlled indoor unit.



2. Check indoor unit EEPROM.

L10 Settings failure Outdoor unit capacity not set. Power reset recovery

Check outdoor unit EEPROM.

L13 Indoor and outdoor unit types

Outdoor unit judged incompatible with the outdoor unit type.

Automatic recovery 1. Check indoor unit EEPROM.2. Check outdoor unit control

PCB.

E06 Outdoor unit detected a signal error from the indoor unit

Serial signals receiving failure (including faulty unit quantity confirmation)

Automatic recovery 1.Check inter-unit control wiring.

2.Check indoor and outdoor unit control PCB.

E07 Automatic recoveryOutdoor unit sending failure to indoor unit

Serial signal sending failure 1.Check inter-unit control wiring.

2.Check outdoor unit control PCB.

Eliminating condition of alarm


5-7

5

Judgement conditionsAlarm

contents Judgement and correctionRemote

controller alarm display

E14 Settings failure Main unit in simultaneous operation multi control duplicated.(Outdoor unit detected)



2. Check indoor unit combination.

E15

E16

E20

E31

H01

Automatic address setting failure



Insufficient indoor unit capacity.




1.Check inter-unit control wiring.


Excessive indoor unit capacity.



Outdoor unit cannot receive any serial signals from indoor units.



E22 Miswiring error Power reset recovery

Inter-unit connection are miswiring error. Missing phase for the outdoor unit power supply.

Check wiring.

Communications trouble within unit

No communication possible with MDC for 3 minutes or longer.

Automatic recovery Check outdoor unit control PCB.

Over-current error Inverter stops after alarm is detected.

Recovery at restart 1.Refrigerant cycle abnormal overload operations.

2.Screws connecting the HIC circuit between the heat sink are loose.

3.Faulty cooling of heat sink.4.Check outdoor unit control

PCB wiring.

Eliminating condition of alarm


5-8

5

5-4. Details of Alarm Messages

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Alarm Details(1) [Alarm “P29”]

Is the power voltage correct?

Are the wiring connector connections OK?

Start of defect diagnosis

Improve the power voltage line.

Repair the wiring connectors.

No

No

Repair the wiring connectors.

Replace the HIC PCB.

HIC PCB sideU (CN202) pinkV (CN203) whiteW (CN204) blue

Correct the capacity setting for the outdoor unit.

No (Abnormal resistance value)

Replace the compressor.No (Defective insulation)

Replace the HIC PCB.No

Replace the outdoor unit control PCB.

No

No

Related partsStart-up failure of the compressor (will not start up)

HIC PCB (Model: [706-type, 906-type] HIC-C1155GDXH8)Outdoor unit control PCB (Model: [706-type, 906-type] CR-C906VH8)Filter PCB (Model: [706-type, 906-type] FIL-C906VH8)

Replace the compressor

Are the U/V/W connections on the HIC PCB and compressor

terminal OK?

Are the capacity settings for the outdoor unit of the outdoor unit control

PCB EEPROM OK?

Are the resistance values permissible at all

areas in HIC PCB?

Yes (No problem with the resistance value)

Is the insulation on the compression OK?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

(No problem with the insulation)

Has the HIC PCB been replaced?

Has the outdoor unit control PCB been

replaced?

Replace the filter PCB.Has the filter PCB

been replaced?

Check the following wiring:

HIC+HIC-VDCIN+VDCIN-HIC1 (10P white)HIC2 (yellow)HIC3 (8P white)VDC2 (2P)

CN200 red

HIC PCB

CN201 whiteCN220 redCN221 redCN100 whiteCN101 yellow 4PCN102 whiteCN240 yellow

CN317 red

Filter PCB

CN318 whiteCN321 redCN322 white


706 type

CN080 whiteCN81 yellow 4PCN103 whiteCN102 white

CN200 red

HIC PCB

CN201 white

CN100 whiteCN101 yellow 3PCN102 whiteCN240 yellow

+

Filter PCB

-


CN080 whiteCN81 yellow 4PCN103 whiteCN102 white

906 type

Check the following:Check to ascertain that the power voltage is within the permissible range of 198 to 264V for indoor unit or 342 to 456V for outdoor unit regardless of whether the compressor is operating or not.

As the compressors used with the 706-type and 906-type models are different, there is a possibility that a P29 error will be triggered if the unit's capacity settings are incorrect.

Inspection Method: Remove the HIC PCB and measure the resistance at all areas.

* Pay special attention to whether the voltage drops after compressor operations while measuring.

See attached documentation. Replace the HIC PCB if the readings are below permissible values.

Potential cause: PCB Insulation failure caused by the compressor lock.

Remove the wires from the connectors on the top of the compressor. Measure the insulation resistance of the U, V and W phases and confirm that they are 1M or more.

Potential problems are most likely in accordance with the following sequence when it is determined that the PCB is trouble with an alarm P29.1. HIC PCB2. Outdoor unit control PCB3. Filter PCBReplace the relevant PCB in accordance with the diagnosis flow.

Verification Method


5-9

5

No

No (alarm P26 output)

Yes

Yes

Yes(Not operating on high load)

(An alarm other than the alarm P26 occur)Yes

(2) [Alarm P26]

Was everything OK

flow of alarm P29 were checked?

Is the heat sink connected properly to the

HIC PCB? (Loose screws and thermal conduction

putty)


Implement the same check processes for to in the diagnosis flow of alarm P29.

NoCorrect the connection between the HIC PCB and heat sink.

No

Operating on high load.Recovery methods differ in accordance with the cause.

Recharge refrigerantReplace the thermistorRepair the pipes, etc.

Replace the HIC PCB.

NoImplement the same check processes for to in the diagnosis flow of alarm P29.

Replace the compressor

Is the high-pressure for the refrigerant cycle within

the range? (High load operating?)

Does the alarm P26 occur when the

U / V / W wires (pink/white/blue) are disconnected from the

HIC PCB and operation was

started?

Was everything OK when to in the diagnosis

flow of alarm P29 were checked?

Yes

Abonormal temperature rise in the HIC PCB is prevented by radiating the heat, with HIC being coated evenly with thermal conduction putty and the heat sink being attached firmly to the HIC PCB by screws. The HIC PCB cannot radiate heat properly if the screws are loose or the thermal conduction putty is not applied correctly. Consequently, the temperature inside the HIC PCB can rise abnormally and the alarm P26 occurs.

The HIC PCB is considered faulty if the alarm P26 occurs even if the compressor is not operating owing to the U, V and W wires being disconnected. Replace the HIC PCB.

Potential problems are most likely in accordance with the following sequence when it is determined that the PCB is trouble with an alarm P26.1. HIC PCB2. Outdoor unit control PCB3. Filter PCBReplace the relevant PCBs in accordance with the above sequence.

in the diagnosis when to

1. Potential Causes

2. Temperature on the high-pressure side during normal operations.

* Verifying Overcharge

* There are cases in which the above temperatures will be lower depending on the operation conditions.

There is no problem if the difference between the temperature on the indoor unit "E2" and the saturated temperature of the outdoor unit's gas pipe service valve pressure is within 2 during the heating mode. Any of the following could be the reason if the former is two or more degrees lower than latter.

Faulty operations of the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve.

Refrigerant overchargeHas the refrigerant been overcharged?

Pipe blockage, crushed pipes, etc.(Assumed to be on the liquid pipes during the cooling mode and the gas pipes during the heating mode.)C1 and C2 thermistor error on the outdoor unit (during the cooling mode.)E1 and E2 thermistor error on the indoor unit (during the heating mode.)

Cooling: Temperature of the C2 thermistor on the outdoor unit is approximately between 45 and 55 .Temperature of the E2 thermistor on the indoor unit is approximately between 40 and 50 .

Heating:

Related partsStart-up failure of the compressor (will not start up)

HIC PCB (Model: [706-type, 906-type] HIC-C1155GDXH8)Outdoor unit control PCB (Model: [706-type, 906-type] CR-C906VH8)Filter PCB (Model: [706-type, 906-type] FIL-C906VH8)


5-10

5

HIC-C1155GDXH8(706, 906 Types)

HIC +

Between terminals Resistance

HIC +

HIC +

HIC +

HIC –

HIC –

HIC –

HIC –

U

V

W

U

V

W

Resistance

200 k or more

300 k or more

300 k or more

300 k or more

200 k or more

200 k or more

200 k or more

No

Yes

Replace outdoor unit

control PCB.

(3) [Alarm “E31”] (communications trouble at unit)

Is “E31” displayed even after the power voltage

is reset?

Normal

HIC HIC +UVW


5-11

5

No

No

Yes

Yes

(4) [Alarm "P22"] Outdoor unit fan motor drive circuit trouble

Are the connectors CN003, CN005, CN041 and CN042 connected correctly to

the outdoor unit control PCB?


Correct the connections

Does the fan rotate without resistance

when spun manually after the connectors CN003, CN005, CN041 and CN042 are

disconnected from the outdoor unit control PCB?

Normal operation?

ReplaceFan motor trouble

No

ReplaceFan motor trouble

ReplaceOutdoor unit control PCB is faulty.

Yes

Complete


5-12

5

No

No

Yes

Yes

Check the outdoor unit control PCB.

Replace if PCB has failed.

Sensor trouble(5) [Alarms “F04,” “F06,” “F07,” “F08,” “F12”]

Are the connectors of the sensor

020 (C2), 021 (C1), 022 (TS), 023 (TO) and 024 (TD) connected

correctly to the outdoor unit control PCB ?

Are the characteristics of resistance values of the

sensors C2, C1, TS, TO and TD sensors normal? *

Correct the connections.

Replace the sensors C2, C1, TS, TO and TD.

* Refer to “5-5. Table of Thermistor Characteristics.”



5-13

5

Sensor Temperature Display Function (Displayed regardless of operation and stop)

The below check procedure can be used to display all remote controller, indoor unit, and outdoor unit sensor temperatures.

<Check procedure>(1) Press and hold the button and button simultaneously for

4 seconds or longer.(2) Unit No. X-X (main unit No.), item code XX (sensor address),

and service monitor 00XX (sensor temperature) appear on the remote controller LCD. (See figure.)

(3) Press the temperature setting and buttons and change the item code to the sensor address of the sensor that you want to monitor. (For the relationship between the sensor address and the sensor type, refer to the below Sensor Temperature Correlation Table.)

(4) During group control and simultaneous-operation multi control, press the button and change to the unit that you want to monitor.

(5) Press the button to return to normal remote controller operation.

NOTE

The temperature display reads “- - - - ” for units that are not connected.If monitor mode is selected during normal operation, the only parts of the LCD that change are those shown in the figure 2.

Fig. 2

All other displays do not change, and remain as they were during normal operation.

Sensor Temperature Correlation Table

Sensor installation location

Sensor address

Sensor typeSensor address

Sensor type

Indoor unit

00

01020304

Room temp. (temp. used for control)*

Remote controller temp.Indoor intake temp.

Indoor heat exchanger temp. (E1)Indoor heat exchanger temp. (E2)

05

06070809

–

Discharge temp.–––

Outdoor unit

0A0b0C

0d

0E

0F10

11

Discharge temp. (TD)–

–

Intake temp. (TS)

Outdoor heat exchanger temp. (C1)

Outdoor heat exchanger temp. (C2)

–

Outdoor air temp.(TO)

1213 14

15

16

1718

19

––

Current (AC current or CT 10 times value)

Outdoor electronic control valve position (PMV1)

Outdoor electronic control valve position (PMV2)

Compressor frequency

––

* Main unit only when group control is enabled.

*

RCS-TM80BG

Example: Unit No.: Item code (sensor address): Discharge temp. (TD)

(3)

(2)

(5) (1) (4)


5-14

5

5-5. Table of Thermistor Characteristics

(1) Outdoor Air Temp. (TO) Sensor, Intake Temp. (TS) Sensor, Heat Exchanger Temp. (C1) Sensor, Heat Exchanger Temp. (C2) Sensor

(2) Discharge Temp. (TD) Sensor

Res

ista

nce

(k)

Temperature ( C)

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 0

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

20

Res

ista

nce

(k)

Res

ista

nce

(k)

Temperature ( C) Temperature ( C)

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0 -20 -15 -10 - 5 0 5 10 15 20

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0 20 30 40 50 60


5-15

5

5-6. How to Remove the Compressor

Pay careful attention to prevent water or foreign objects from entering into the refrigerant tubing when removing or installing the compressor.

1. After collecting the refrigerant in the system, replace nitrogen gas from the service port of the gas tubing valve.

2. Remove the sound absorbing material protecting the compressor.

3. Remove the cap of the compressor's terminal and then remove the power source terminal and TD sensor.

4. Remove the crank case heater.

5. Remove the bolts (x3) and then remove the washer and rubber spacer.

6. Cut off the compressor side's suction tube because the suction tube is solid and unmoveable. See the diagram below.

7. Remove the discharge side's brazing part (x1). See the diagram below. NOTE: Protect the sensor part, sheet metal, rubber, lead wire and clamper.

8. Pull the compressor toward you.

9. Remove the suction side's brazing part (x1) of the cut-off compressor side's suction tube connected to the suction tube.

Suction side's brazing part

Discharge side's brazing part

Compressor

Removing

Suction tube

Compressor side's suction tube


5-16

5

5-7. How to Remove the Electrical Component Box

1. Remove the front panel and inspection panel from the outdoor unit.

2. Remove all local wires connected to the electrical component box.

3. Remove the wires (temperature sensor, coils of every sort of valve, pressure switch, fan motor and wires for connecting compressor) connected to the electrical component box in the unit.

4. Remove the fixture screws (x6) as shown in the diagram and remove the electrical component box.NOTE:Be sure to remove the upper left side screw marked by * in the diagram because that screw cannot be seen from the front side.

Outdoor unit before removal of front panel Fixture screws (x6) for electrical component box

Electrical component box after removal

Inspection panel

Front panel

Removing


6-1

6

6. OUTDOOR UNIT MAINTENANCE REMOTE CONTROL

6-1. Overview ....................................................................................................................... 6-2

6-2. Functions ...................................................................................................................... 6-2

6-3. Normal Display Operations and Functions ............................................................... 6-3

6-4. Monitoring Operations: Display of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit Sensor Temperatures ............................................................................................................... 6-6

6-5. Monitoring the Outdoor Unit Alarm History: Display of Outdoor Unit AlarmHistory .......................................................................................................................... 6-7

6-6. Settings Modes: Setting the Outdoor Unit EEPROM ................................................ 6-7


6-2

6

6-1. Overview

What is the outdoor unit maintenance remote controller?Beginning with the DC-INV series of outdoor units, nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) is used in the outdoor unit PCB. In this way, the setting switches that were located on earlier PCBs have been converted to EEPROM data. This remote controller is an outdoor unit maintenance tool that is used to make and change the EEPROM set-tings.This remote controller can be used for checking the outdoor unit EEPROM settings and contents, and also can be used to monitor the outdoor unit alarm history and indoor/outdoor unit temperatures, and to check the status of the indoor unit connec-tions (No. of units, operating status, etc.).

Note: Because this tool does not function as a remote controller, it is used only during test runs and servicing.

* The special service checker wiring is required in order to connect the outdoor unit maintenance remote controller to the outdoor unit PCB.

* Even when the outdoor unit maintenance remote controller is connected, a separate remote controller or other con-trol device must be connected to the indoor unit.

6-2. Functions Normal display functions

(1) Functions: Button operations can be used to perform the following functions.

• Start/stop of all indoor units

• Switching between cooling and heating

• Test run of all indoor units

• High-speed operation of indoor units (Do not use with actual units. This may damage the devices.)

(2) Display: The following can be displayed.

• Alarm details display

• No. of indoor/outdoor units

• Unit Nos. of connected indoor/outdoor units

• Indoor/outdoor unit operating status (blinks when an alarm occurs)

• Indoor unit thermostat ON

• Individual display of outdoor unit alarms

• Outdoor unit compressor total operating time

• Outdoor unit oil sensor oil level

• Outdoor unit total power ON time

• Outdoor unit microcomputer version

• Other Temperature monitor

• Displays the indoor/outdoor unit sensor temperatures. Outdoor unit alarm history monitor

• Displays the outdoor unit alarm history. Setting modes

• Setting mode 1 and setting mode 2 are used to make the outdoor EEPROM setting.

RCS-TM80BG

System diagram Outdoor unit maintenance remote controller

Remote controller

Outdoor unit

ACC-CR-RCS

Interface for outdoor unitmaintenance remote controller


Inter-unit control wiring (main bus)

Indoorunit

Indoorunit

Remotecontroller

Remotecontroller

Special service checker wiring

Manual supplied

(Optional, Servicing No:8540528057900)


6-3

6

6-3. Normal Display Operations and Functions

Remote controller Assy

Special service checker wiring

PCB connector (3P, blue)

PCB connector (5P, red)

RC (5P, red)


Relay connector (2P, white)

Normal display functions

Connect the special service checker wiring to the outdoor unit PCB.The connection is shown in the figure below.

* It is not necessary to disconnect the communications line in the inter-unit control wiring if it has already been con-nected at this time.

* Setting modes 1 and 2 can be used even when the outdoor unit is independent (when 1 maintenance remote con-troller is connected to 1 outdoor unit and automatic address setting for the indoor units has not been completed).

* Displays the overall system status for that refrigerant system.

All units start/stop (Fig. 6-1)<Operation>The button can be used to start and stop all the indoor units.

The LED turns ON when 1 or more indoor units is operating.

The LED blinks when an alarm has occurred at 1 or more indoor units during operation.

Switching between cooling/heating (Fig. 6-1)<Operation>The button switches between heating and cooling modes.

The specifications are equivalent to the heating/cooling input that was present on earlier outdoor unit PCBs.

The display shows the operating mode of the indoor unit with the lowest number.

All units test run (Fig. 6-2)<Operation>The button switches test run ON/OFF for all indoor units.

Press and hold for 4 seconds to turn ON. “Test run” is displayed while the test run is in progress.

Conditions of test runs that are started from the unit remote controller are not displayed on the outdoor unit maintenance remote controller.

Fig. 6-1

Fig.6-2

Interface for outdoor unit maintenance remote controller (ACC-CR-RCS)


6-4

6

Display (functions)

• Use the temperature setting and buttons to change the item code.

skrameRstnetnoc yalpsiDedoc metI

00 (1) sutats laitini tAlamron nehw FFO :)edoc( stnetnoc mrala tinu roodtuOBlinking 8-alarm code display at pre-trip, LED (2)

01 No. of indoor units connected in that refrigerant system

02 Unit. Nos. of connected indoor units in that refrigerant system *2

03 Operating status of indoor units in that refrigerant system (blinks when alarms occur) *2

04 Unit Nos. of indoor units in that refrigerant system where the thermostats are ON *2

05 No. of outdoor units connected in that refrigerant system No. of connected units: 1

06 Unit Nos. of connected outdoor units in that refrigerant system *2

07 Operating status of outdoor units in that refrigerant system (blinks when alarms occur) *2

08

09

0A

0b

0C

0d

0E

0F

10 Total compressor operating time (in 1-hr. units) *3

11

12

13

14

15

16 Total power ON time of outdoor unit (in 1-hr. units)

17 Compressor start count

18

19

FE Outdoor unit microcomputer firmware version

FF Outdoor unit microcomputer software version

* See following page for *2 and *3.• XX-YY R.C. Displays the outdoor unit address of the selected outdoor sub-bus. XX = Main bus line outdoor system address (1 – 30) YY = Outdoor unit address in outdoor sub-bus (1 – 8). This is “1”

when there is only 1 outdoor unit.

02: <Unit Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 are connected>

<Sample displays>

01: <No. of connected indoor units>4 units connected

Locations where (1), (2), and (3) are displayedas shown below.

LED(3)

(1)(2)


6-5

6

*2: 7-segment, 4-digit display for remote controller timer display

The connected unit Nos. are displayed as shown below, using the 7-segment 4-digit ( ) display and the colon.

—

— — — —

— — —

1

2 7 12 17

3 13 1884 14 199

5 10 15 20

6 11 16

21

22 27 32 37

23 33 382824 34 3929

25 30 35 40

26 31 36

Display for unit Nos. 1 – 20

Display for unit Nos. 21 – 40

Not lit

Lit

Not lit

Lit

Not lit

Lit

Not lit

Lit

• Display of unit No. 1

• Display of unit Nos. 1 and 2

• Display of unit Nos. 1, 2, and 3

• Display of unit Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4

Not lit

Lit

Not lit

Lit

Not lit

Lit

Not lit

Lit

Meaning of display colon

Meaning of display colon

is not displayed.

The meaning of the colon display changes in the same way, allowing unit Nos. up to 80 to be displayed.

Sample displays of the unit Nos. of connected indoor units

NOTE

The colon display (Unit Nos. 1 – 20, 21 – 40) changes automatically every 10 seconds.

(The display does not change if higher unit numbers do not exist.)Pressing the button switches the display immediately to the next higher level, even if 10 seconds have not passed.

(A) and (B) are displayed alternately.

BA

10: <Total compressor operating time>

*3: The total compressor operating time is displayed (in 1-hour units) using 8 digits.

When the fi rst 4 digits are displayed, the top point of the colon is lit.When the last 4 digits are displayed, the colon points are not lit.The display of the fi rst 4 and last 4 digits changes automatically every 10 seconds. It can also be changed by pressing the button.

•

•

•

NOTE

With the outdoor unit maintenance remote controller (when connected to the outdoor unit), the unit remote controller check functions will not operate.


6-6

6

(3)

(1)

(4)

(2)

6-4. Monitoring Operations: Display of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit Sensor Temperatures

<Operating procedure>

(1) Press and hold the button and button simultaneously for 4 seconds or longer to switch to temperature monitor mode.During temperature monitoring, “Service Monitor” is lit.(The display and operations are the same as when monitor mode is started from the unit remote controller.)

(2) Press the button and select the indoor unit to monitor.

(3) Use the temperature setting and buttons to select the item code of the temperature to monitor.The selected indoor unit No. and the temperature data are displayed.

(4) To end monitoring, press the button. The display returns to the normal display.

* The display does not blink.

edoC fo gninaeMedoc metI

Indoor unit data 02 Indoor unit intake temp.

03 Indoor unit heat exchanger temp. (E1)

04 Indoor unit heat exchanger temp. (E2)

05 –

–06

07 –

08 –

09

Outdoor unit data 0A Discharge temp. (TD)

0b –

–

0C

0d Intake temp. (TS)

0E Outdoor unit heat exchanger temp. (C1)

0F

Outdoor unit heat exchanger temp. (C2)

10 –

11 Outdoor air temp. (TO)

12 –

13 –

14 Current value

15 Outdoor MV value (1)

16 Outdoor MV value (2)

19 Frequency

* Depending on the model, some items may not be displayed.


6-7

6

6-5. Monitoring the Outdoor Unit Alarm History: Display of Outdoor Unit Alarm HistoryDisplays outdoor unit alarms only. Does not display indoor unit alarms.Check the indoor unit alarm histories separately using the indoor unit remote controllers or other control device.

<Operating procedure>(1) Press and hold the button and button simultaneously for 4 seconds or

longer to change to outdoor unit alarm history mode. During the alarm history display, “Service Check” is lit. The display and operations are the same as the monitoring of the alarm device history that is performed using the unit remote controller. However, the outdoor unit address appears instead of the unit No.

↓(2) Press the button and select the outdoor unit for alarm history monitoring.

↓(3) Use the temperature setting and buttons to select the item code for the alarm history.

The display shows the address of the selected outdoor unit, the item code, and the alarm history (alarm data). The outdoor unit address is displayed as system XX-YY. System XX = Outdoor unit system address

↓ YY = Outdoor unit sub-bus address

The item code is displayed as 01 – 08. 01 indicates the most recent alarm.The alarm history is indicated by the alarm code. (If there have been no alarm codes, “ ” is displayed.)

(4) To clear the alarm history, press the button. (The outdoor unit alarm history will be cleared.)

↓(5) To end, press the button. The display returns to the normal remote controller display.

6-6. Settings Modes: Setting the Outdoor Unit EEPROMSetting mode 1

<Operating procedure>

(1) Press and hold the button and button simultaneously for 4 seconds or longer.

(2) Use the temperature setting and buttons to change the item code. The item codes and setting data are shown in the table of “List of Item Codes” on the next page.

(3) Use the timer time and buttons to change the setting data.To confi rm the changed setting data, press the button.(At this time, “Setting” stops blinking and remains lit.)

(4) During this mode, “Setting” is displayed, blinking. The outdoor unit address display section displays “ALL,” the item code and number (DN value in the table), and the setting data (6 digits). (The setting data is displayed in 6 digits. The display changes between the fi rst 3 digits (Fig.A ) and the last 3 digits (Fig. B ). When the fi rst 3 digits are displayed, the top point of the colon is lit.)

(5) To end the setting mode, press the button.

**

(3)

(1) (4) (2)(5)

are displayed alternately.

Display of first 3 digits A

B Display of last 3 digits

and(Example shows display of 000 001.)A B

(3)(1)

(2)

(5)

(3)(1)

(2)

(5)


6-8

6

List of Item Codes (Some item codes cannot be set due to the type of models.)

ParameterItem code

01 Control system schedule



04 Snowfall sensor operation 0 = No sensor, control performed 1 = No sensor, control not performed

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

22 = 22 o'clock (at shipment)

00 = 00 minute (at shipment)

0 = 50dB(A) mode , 1 = 45dB(A) mode

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

Do not set

2 = Sensor present, control performed3 = Sensor present, control not performed

05 Control system schedule Do not set


07 Ignore capacity 0 = Disabled 1 = Ignores capacity ratio



0A Control system schedule

0b Control system schedule

0C Forced operation of 0 = Disabledindoor unit drain pump 1 = During cooling only, 2 hours stopped + 20 minutes operating

(regardless of whether the unit is running or stopped)2 = During cooling only, 4 hours stopped + 20 minutes operating (regardless of whether the unit is running or stopped)3 = At all times, 4 hours stopped + 20 minutes operating4 = At all times, 2 hours stopped + 20 minutes operating

0d Control system schedule Do not set

1 = Cooling only0 = Heat pump

1 = Available0 = Non

Cooling only0E

0F Control system schedule


11 Multi-floor installation



20 Cool OL control

21 Silent mode

70% ~ 100% (40% ~ 160% setting capable)Demand 150

70% ~ 100% (40% ~ 160% setting capable)Demand 251

52 Current control level 70% ~ 100% , -1 (No control) (40% ~ 160% setting capable)

57

58

59

5A

5B

* Figures in parentheses indicate the data at the time of shipment from the factory.

Silent mode starting time (hour)

Silent mode starting time (minute)

08 = 8 o'clock (at shipment)Silent mode finishing time (hour)

00 = 00 minute (at shipment)Silent mode finishing time (minute)

0 = Normal (at shipment) 1 = Auto silent 2 = Capacity prioritySilent mode


6-9

66

Setting mode 2<Operating procedure>

(1) Press and hold the button, button, and button simultaneously for 4 seconds or longer.

(2) Use the temperature setting and buttons to change the item code. The item codes and setting data are shown in the table below.

(3) Use the timer time and buttons to change the setting data.To confirm the changed setting data, press the button.(At this time, “Setting” stops blinking and remains lit.)

(4) During this mode, “Setting” is displayed, blinking. The display shows the set outdoor unit address “System XX-YY” (System XX = System address, YY = Address at outdoor unit sub-bus), item code number (DN value in the table below), and the setting data (6 digits).(The setting data is displayed in 6 digits. The display changes between the first 3 digits (Fig. A ) and the last 3 digits (Fig. B ). When the first 3 digits are displayed, the top point of the colon is lit.)

(5) To end the setting mode, press the button. The display returns to the normal display mode.

(3)(1)

(2)

(5)

80: <Refrigerant type> A and B are displayed alternately. (Example shows 000 410 (R410A).)

Display of first 3 digits Display of last 3 digitsA B

(3)(1)

(2)

(5)

List of Item Codes

Item code Parameter

80 Refigerant typer 407 = R407C 22 = R22 410 = R410A

81 Outdoor unit capacity* 0 = Disabled 22 25 28 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 71 80 90 100 112 125 140 160 180 200 224 250 280 340 355 400 450 500 560 600 630 670 710 800 840



84 3-phase or single-phase 0 = 3-phase 1 = single-phase

0 = Disabled 1 = 50Hz85 Power frequency





8A Control system schedule Do not set

8b Control system schedule Do not set

8E Control temp. for outdoor fan's crack preventionUpward fan

model only available

Setting temperature range : -125Crack prevention of outdoor fan actuates when the outdoor temp. reaches lower than the setting values.

~ +125

(*) Figures represent the capacity data for each model.


7

7-1. Simple Settings Function .......................................................................................... 7-2

7-2. List of Simple Setting Items ...................................................................................... 7-3

7-3. Detailed Settings Function ........................................................................................ 7-4

7-4. List of Detailed Setting Items .................................................................................... 7-5

7-5. Simple Setting Items.................................................................................................. 7-9

7-6. Detaild Setting Items ................................................................................................. 7-12

7-7. Remote Controller Servicing Functions .................................................................. 7-16

7-8. Test Run Function ...................................................................................................... 7-16

7. REMOTE CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS SECTION

7-1


7

7-1. Simple Settings Function

This allows the filter lifetime, operating mode priority change, central control address, and other settings to be made for an individual or group-control indoor unit to which the remote controller used for simple settings is connected.

When simple settings mode is engaged, operation stops at the individual or group-control indoor unit to which the remote controller for simple settings is connected.

<Procedure>

1 Press and hold the and buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or longer.

2 “ ,” unit No. “ ” (or “ ” in the case of group control), item code “ ,” and settings data “ ” are displayed blinking on the remote controller LCD display (Fig. 7-1). At this time, the indoor unit fan (or all indoor unit fans in the case of group control) begins operating.

3 If group control is in effect, press the button and select the address (unit No.) of the indoor unit to set. At this time, the fan at the indoor unit begins operating.

If unit No. “ ” is displayed, the same setting will be made for all indoor units.

4 Press the temperature setting / buttons to select the item code to change.

5 Press the timer time / buttons to select the desired setting data.

For item codes and setting data, refer to the following page.

6 Press the button. (The display stops blinking and remains lit, and setting is completed.)

7 Press the button to return to normal remote controller display.

•

*

*

Fig. 7-1

RCS-TM80BG

2

3

4

1 6 5

7

Fig. 7-1

7-2


7

7-2. List of Simple Setting Items

Item code ItemSetting data

No. Description

Filter sign ON time (filter life time)

0000 Not displayed0001 150 hours0002 2,500 hours0003 5,000 hours0004 10,000 hours0005 Use the filter clogging sensor.

Degree of filter fouling0000 Standard (setting at time of shipping)

0001Highly fouled(Filter sign ON time is reduced to one-half the set time.)

Central control address

0001 Central control address 10002 Central control address 20003 Central control address 3

0064 Central control address 640099 No central control address set (setting at time of shipping)

Operating mode priority change

0000 Normal ( setting at time of shipping)0001 Priority

Fan speed when heating thermostat is

OFF

Compressor ON Compressor OFF0000 MED 1 min., LO 3 min. LO0001 MED LO0002 LO LO0004 MED 1 min., LO 3 min. MED0005 MED MED0006 LO MED

Heating intake temperature shift

0000 No shift0001 Shifts intake temperature 1 °C down.0002 Shifts intake temperature 2 °C down.0003 Shifts intake temperature 3 °C down.0004 Shifts intake temperature 4 °C down.0005 Shifts intake temperature 5 °C down.0006 Shifts intake temperature 6 °C down.

Electric heater installation

0000 No heater0001 Heater installed

Humidifying when heater thermostat is

0000 No (setting at time of shipping)0001 Yes

Permit/prohibit automatic

0000 Permit

0001 Prohibit

Cool-only0000 Normal0001 Cool only (Set “1” for item code OD.)

NOTE

In order to avoid water leakage and damage to the fan, do not set for humidifying when the thermostat is OFF unless a vaporizing humidifier is used.

Consider the device purpose and type when changing the settings. Incorrect settings may result in malfunction.

Do not change any setting data that does not appear in this list.

The 10-hp 4-way ceiling cassette has 2 indoor unit addresses. Set both of them.

•

•

•

•

7-3


7

This allows the system address, indoor unit address, and other settings to be made for the individual or group-control indoor unit to which the remote controller used for detailed settings is connected.

When detailed settings mode is engaged, operation stops at the individual or group-control indoor unit where the remote controller used for detailed settings is connected. Simple settings items can also be set at this time.

<Procedure>

1 Press and hold the , and buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or longer.

2 “ ,” unit No. “ ” (or “ ” in the case of group control), item code “ ,” and settings data “ ” are displayed blinking on the remote controller LCD display (Fig. 7-2).

At this time, the indoor unit fan (or all indoor unit fans in the case of group control) begins operating.

3 If group control is in effect, press the button and select the address (unit No.) of the indoor unit to set. At this time, the fan at the indoor unit begins operating.

4 Press the temperature setting / buttons to select the item code to change.

5 Press the timer time / buttons to select the desired setting data.

For item codes and setting data, refer to the following page.

6 Press the button. (The display stops blinking and remains lit, and setting is completed.)


•

* RCS-TM80BG

2

1 6 51

7

3

4

Fig. 7-2

7-3. Detailed Settings Function

7-4


7

Item code

ItemSetting data

No. Description No. Description No. Description

Type

00001-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed (A)

00014-Way Air Discharge

Semi-Concealed

(X, XM)0002

2-Way Air Discharge Semi-Concealed (S)


Semi-Concealed Slim (L)0005

Concealed-Duct

(U, US)0006

Concealed-Duct High Static Pressure (D)

0007 Ceiling-Mounted (T) 0008 Wall-mounted (K) 0010 Floor Standing (F)

0011Concealed Floor Standing (FM)

Indoor unit capacity

0001 22 (Type 74 ) 0003 28 (Type 94) 0005 36 (Type 124)

0009 56 (Type 184) 001171 (Type 254)

For FR254 and FMR254

001280 (Type 254)

(Except FR254, FMR254)

0015 112 (Type 364) 0017 140 (Type 484) 0018 160 (Type 604)

0021 224 (Type 704) 0023 280 (Type 964)

System address

0001 Unit No. 1

0002 Unit No. 2

0003 Unit No. 3

0030 Unit No. 30

0099 Not set

Indoor unit address

0001 Unit No. 1

0002 Unit No. 2

0003 Unit No. 3

0064 Unit No. 64

0099 Not set

Group control address

0000 Individual (1:1 = Indoor unit with no group wiring)

0001 Main unit (One of the group-control indoor units)

0002 Sub unit (All group-control indoor units except for main unit)

0099 Not set

Cooling intake temperature

shift

–010 Shifts intake temperature by –10°C.



0000 No intake temperature shift

0001 Shifts intake temperature by +1°C.



Automatic stop time after operation start

0000 Function disabled

0001 Stops automatically 5 minutes after operation starts.


Can be set in 5-minute units.

* 0123 Stops automatically 615 minutes after operation starts.



7-4. List of Detailed Setting Items

7-5


7


No. Description

(1B)Forced thermostat ON

time0000 5 minutes0001 4 minutes

Cooling discharge temperature shift

–010 –10°C

–009 –9°C

–008 –8°C

0010 10°C

Heating discharge temperature shift

–010 –10°C

–009 –9°C

–008 –8°C

0010 10°C

Temperature shift for cooling/heating change in auto heat/cool mode

0001 ± 1°C0002 ± 2°C0003 ± 3°C

0007 ± 7°C

(Upper limit)

(Lower limit)

Change to remote control temperature

setting range

Coo

ling

0018 18°C (Lower limit at shipment)0019 19°C

0029 29°C0030 30°C (Upper limit at shipment)

(Upper limit)

(Lower limit)

Hea

ting



(Upper limit)

(Lower limit)

Dry

ing



(Upper limit)

(Lower limit) Aut

o he

at/c

ool 0017 17°C (Lower limit at shipment)

0018 18°C


Humidifier operation0000 Normal0001 Ignore heat exchanger temperature conditions.

Filter (CN70) input switching

0000 Filter input (differential pressure switch input)0001 Alarm input (for trouble input about air cleaner or similar device)

0002Humidifier input (Operates linked with drain pump when humidifier is ON.)

Indoor unit electronic control valve

0000 Present (Setting at shipment)0002 None

T10 terminal switching0000

Normal (Used as optional relay PCB or JEMA standard HA terminal.)

0001 Used for OFF reminder0002 Fire prevention input

7-6


7


No. Description

Automatic drain pump operation

0000 No forced operation0001 Forced operation for 1 minute

0060 Continuous operation

Ventilation fan operation0000 None

0001 Ventilation fan operated by remote controller.

Wired remote controller sensor

0000 Not used. (Body sensor is used.)0001 Remote control sensor is used.

“Operation change control in progress” display

0000 Normal (displayed)

0001 Not displayed

OFF reminder function for when weekly timer is used

0000 None

0001 Only stop time setting is enabled.

Heat exchanger temperature for cold air discharge

(Heat exchanger control point for control to prevent

cold air)

0013 Control temperature 13°C0014 Control temperature 14°C

0025 Control temperature 25°C0026 Control temperature 26°C

Fan output switching0000 Output linked with fan. (ON when indoor unit fan is operating.)0001 Fan mode operation output

Drain pump delayed start time

0000 No delayed start0001 1 sec. delayed start

0002 2 sec. delayed start

0058 58 sec. delayed start0059 59 sec. delayed start0060 60 sec. delayed start

Humidifier setting

0000 Humidifier output OFF. Drain pump stopped.0001 Humidifier output ON. Drain pump operates.

0002Humidifier output ON. Drain pump operates for 1 minute when total humidifier operating time reaches 60 minutes.

0003 Humidifier output ON. Drain pump stopped.

Flap operation mode

0000 Standard setting

0001Draft reduction mode (Flap lower-limit position is shifted upwards.)

Flap swing mode

0000Smudging reduction mode (Flap swing upper-limit position is shifted downwards.)

0001 Normal mode

0002Draft reduction mode (Flap swing lower-limit position is shifted upwards.)

7-7


7


No. Description

Fan tap setting(Fan tap change in order

to prevent drop in air discharge caused by filter

installation)

DC fan tap operating mode

Purpose

0000 Standard Standard (setting at shipment)

0001

High ceiling use High ceiling setting 1 (with standard panel)

For low static-pressure filter

Ultra long-life filter, oil guard panel, ammonia deodorizing filter, optical regenerative deodorizing filter

0003

High ceiling use High ceiling setting 2 (with standard panel)

For low static-pressure filter

(Antibacterial) high-performance filter (90%) (Antibacterial) high-performance filter (65%) Air-cleaning unit, air-cleaning unit + optical regenerative deodorizing filter, deodorant (activated charcoal) filter

For air-blocking material

For 3-way discharge, when discharge duct is connected

0006For air-blocking material

For 2-way discharge

Humidifier ON time(ON time per 60 seconds)

0000 No humidifier output

0001 1 sec.

0002 2 sec.

0058 58 sec.

0059 59 sec.

0060 Continuously ON

Repeat timer switching0000 Function disabled

0001 Function enabled

Timer function change prohibit

0000 Function disabled

0001 Function enabled

Smudging control 0000 No smudging control

7-8


7

Item code Item Description

01Filter sign ON time setting (filter lifetime)

Changes the indoor unit filter lifetime when a high-performance filter or other optional product is installed.

02 Degree of filter foulingReduces the filter sign ON time to 1/2 of the standard time (setting at the time of shipping) for cases when filter fouling is more severe than normal.

Filter sign ON times for each model

Model data

Model

Filter sign ON time

Standard Long-lifeSuper

long-life

High performance

65

High performance

90Pressure

differential switch


Semi-Concealed (A)150 75 2500 1250 x x x x x x x

0001

4-Way Air Discharge

Semi-Concealed

(X, XM)

x x 2500 1250 5000 2500 2500 1250 x x x


Semi-Concealed (S)x x 2500 1250 10000 5000 2500 1250 2500 1250 x

0003

1-Way Air Discharge

Semi-Concealed Slim (SL)

x x 2500 1250 x x x x x x x

0005 Concealed Duct (U) x x 2500 1250 5000 2500 2500 1250 5000 2500 x

0006

Concealed Duct

High Static Pressure (D)

x x 2500 1250 x x 2500 1250 5000 2500 x

0007 Ceiling-Mounted (T) x x 2500 1250 x x 2500 1250 x x x

0008 Wall-Mounted (K) 150 75 x x x x x x x x x

0010 Floor Standing (F) 150 75 x x x x x x x x x

0011Concealed Floor Standing (FM)

150 75 x x x x x x x x x

NOTE

x indicates that there is no corresponding filter.

indicates the filter sign ON time that is set at shipment)

High fouling: Set when is selected for the degree of filter fouling (item code ).

•

•

•

Standard High

fouling

Standard High

fouling

Standard High

fouling

Standard High

fouling

Standard High

fouling

7-5. Simple Setting Items

7-9


7


03 Central control addressSet when using a central control device.Used when setting the central control address manually from the remote controller.

04 Operating mode priority change Note (1)

NOTE

(1) Explanation of operation mode priority change

Enabled only in 2WAY MULTI heat-pump models.

<Function>

With indoor units that are installed in combination with an outdoor unit model where either heating or cooling operation can be selected, the operating mode of the indoor unit that starts first takes priority. The first indoor unit to operate can select any operating mode. When any mode other than fan mode is selected, then the operating modes that cannot be selected are not displayed on all remote controllers that are subsequently operated. “Operation change control in progress” is displayed, indicating that there are restrictions on the operating modes that can be selected.

Controlling the operating mode from a specific remote controller When there are multiple remote controllers in the same refrigerant system, it is possible to set one remote controller as the priority remote controller (the remote controller which is given priority for selecting the operating mode). (If 2 or more remote controllers are set as priority remote controllers, an alarm will occur at the remote controllers, and operation will not be possible.)

- When the priority remote controller is set to the operating mode for control, then all other remote controllers can select only the permitted operating mode, regardless of whether the priority remote controller is operating or stopped.

- When a controlled remote controller is operated, “Operation change control in progress” is displayed.

Set mode at priority remote controller Modes that can be selected at other remote controllers

Cooling or dry Cooling, dry, fan

Heating Heating, fan

Fan Whichever mode (heating/cooling) is selected first

NOTE

There are other methods to avoid control in which the mode selected first takes priority.

Methods of remotely controlling the operating mode

(1) Use the central functions of a central control device.

(2) Use a remote control relay PCB at the outdoor unit.

•−

−

−

7-10


7

When the operating mode at the priority remote controller is changed, the operating modes of other remote controllers change as shown below.

Mode change at priority remote controller Operating modes at other remote controllers

Current mode New mode Current mode New mode

Cooling or dry HeatingCooling or dry Heating

Fan Fan (not changed)

Heating CoolingHeating Cooling


Cooling DryCooling Cooling (not changed)

Dry Dry (not changed)

Heating DryHeating Cooling


Cooling or dry Fan

Cooling Cooling (not changed)

Dry Dry (not changed)


Heating FanHeating Heating (not changed)



05Fan speed setting when heating thermostat is OFF

Changes the fan speed setting when the heating thermostat is OFF.

06Heating intake temperature shift

Shifts the intake temperature during heating.

Can be set when the body thermostat is used.

07 Electric heater installationSet when cost distribution is performed using an AMY central control system or similar system, and when an optional electric heater is installed. (This is unrelated to control of the electric heater.)

08Humidifying when heater thermostat is OFF

Normally humidifying does not occur when the thermostat is OFF during heating operation. However, this setting can be changed in order to increase the amount of humidifying.Caution: In order to avoid water leakage and damage to the fan, do not use this setting unless a vaporizing humidifier is used.

0DPermit/prohibit automatic heating/cooling

This setting can be used to prevent the automatic heating/cooling display on the remote control if the unit configuration permits automatic heating/cooling operation.

0F Cooling-onlyThis setting allows a heat pump indoor unit to be operated as a cooling-only unit.

7-11


7

Item code Item Description10 Unit type

Set when the indoor unit EEPROM memory is replaced during servicing.11 Indoor unit capacity

12System (outdoor unit) address

These are not set at the time of shipping from the factory.

These must be set after installation if automatic address setting is not performed.

13 Indoor unit address14 Group address

17Cooling intake temperature shift

Shifts the intake temperature during cooling and dry operation.(Enabled only when the body thermostat is used.)Increase this value when it is difficult to turn the thermostat ON.

18Automatic stop time after operation start

The time at which an indoor unit is automatically stopped after operation starts can be set in increments of 5 minutes

1bForced thermostat ON time

Use this setting to change the time for forced operation at installation

or servicing from 5 minutes to 4 minutes.(Enabled only with PAC-i models.)

1CCooling discharge temperature shift

Shifts the set value for models which perform discharge temperature control. (Discharge temperature control models: Floor discharge, wall built-in, direct expansion coil outdoor air treatment, high-fresh)

1dHeating discharge temperature shift

1ETemperature shift for cooling/heating change in “auto heat/cool” mode

“Auto heat/cool” selects the operating mode automatically based on the difference between the room temperature and the temperature set on the remote controller. This setting establishes a shift temperature for the heating/cooling temperature setting relative to the remote controller temperature setting.

Cooling temperature setting

Heating temperature setting

Remote controller temperature setting

Shift temperature

Shift temperature

7-6. Detaild Setting Items

7-12


7

Item code Item Description1F (Upper limit)20 (Lower limit)

Change to the remote control temperature setting range

Cooling

This setting changes the temperature range (upper limit and lower limit) which is set from the remote controller or central control device. The set upper limit must be greater than or equal to the lower limit. If the temperature setting is to be a single point, set the upper limit and lower limit to the same temperature.

21 (Upper limit)22 (Lower limit)

Heating


Drying


Auto heat/cool

29Humidifier operation which ignores the heat exchanger temperature

During heating operation, the humidifier operates when the heat exchanger temperature is suitable for humidifying. This setting is used to ignore this condition for humidifier operation and operate the humidifier more.

2A Filter input switching This setting switches the filter input according to the purpose of use.

2CIndoor unit electronic control valve

This setting indicates whether or not an indoor unit electronic control valve is present. At the time of shipping, this setting is set according to the conditions of the indoor unit.

2E T10 terminal input switchingOrdinarily, the T10 terminal is used as the HA terminal at the time of shipping. However, this setting is used when the T10 terminal is used for OFF reminder or for fire prevention input.

31Ventilation fan operation from remote controller

It is possible to install a total heat exchanger and ventilation fan in the system, which can be started and stopped by the wired remote controller. The ventilation fan can operate linked with the start and stop of the indoor unit, or can be operated even when the indoor unit is stopped.Use a ventilation fan that can accept the no-voltage A contact as the external input signal.In the case of group control, the fans are operated together. They cannot be operated individually.

32Switching to remote controller sensor

This setting is used to switch from the body sensor to the remote controller sensor.Check that “remote controller sensor” is displayed.

Do not use this setting with models that do not include a remote controller sensor.Do not use this setting if both the body sensor and remote sensor are used.

34ON/OFF of “Operation change control in progress” display

In a MULTI system with multiple remote controllers, switching between heating and cooling is restricted, and “Operation change control in progress” is displayed.This setting is used to prevent this display from appearing.Refer to the item concerned with operating mode priorities.

35OFF reminder function for weekly timer

This setting switches the operation when the weekly timer is connected to the remote controller.This can be used to prevent cases in which the unit is accidentally left ON. There is no change when this setting is ON, however it is necessary to set the weekly timer ON time.

(Continued)

7-13


7

(Continued from previous page)


3CHeat exchanger temperature for cold air discharge

The heat exchanger temperature control point for prevention of cold air discharge during heating operation can be changed.

3d Fan output switchingThe indoor unit PCB optional output for the fan can be switched according to the purpose of use.

3EDrain pump delayed start time

The drain pump starts after the set time delay after cooling operation stops.

40Humidifier drain pump setting

This specifies the humidifier and drain pump setting.

45 DC flap operation mode Changes flap operation to draft reduction mode.46 DC flap swing mode Selects the swing operation mode for the flap.

5d DC fan tap settingSets the DC fan tap according to the purpose of use.Change the settings data at the same time.

5E Humidifier ON time

Sets the humidifier output ON time for when the humidifier is operating.ON/OFF control is performed during humidifier operation.This setting therefore sets the ON time per 60-second interval.

5FStop at time set for OFF timer after operation starts

This setting enables a function that stops operation when the amount of time set for the OFF timer has passed after remote controller operation was started.

60Timer function change prohibit

This function prohibits changes from being made to the remote controller time setting.

62 Smudging control Smudging control is disabled when 0000 is set.

7-14


7

<Procedure>

Be sure to turn the main power OFF before performing the steps below.

(1) Check the optional product that will be used from the table below.

Setting No. Optional part name Optional part No.

[1]Super long-life filter AFT-LS140AOil guard panel PNR-S140AAGAmmonia deodorizing filter AFT-DS140AG-AMOptical regeneration deodorizing filter AFT-DS140AG-PC

[3]

High-performance filter, colorimetric 65% type AFT-MS140AHigh-performance filter, colorimetric 90% type AFT-HS140AAir cleaning unit AFT-ES140ADeodorant filter AFT-DS140AGAir-blocking material (for 3-direction discharge) INS-DS140AAir-blocking material (when a discharge duct is connected) INS-DS140A

[6] Air-blocking material (for 2-direction discharge) INS-DS140A

Setting No. [1] : Go to (2).Setting No. [3] : Go to (3).Setting No. [6] : Go to (4).

DC Fan Tap Change Procedure

(2) Setting No. [1]Open the cover of the electrical component box, and connect the supplied shortcircuit connector (2P, yellow) to short-circuit pin TP1 (2P, red) on the indoor unit control PCB.

(3) Setting No. [3]

Open the cover of the electrical component box, and connect the supplied shortcircuit connector (2P, yellow) to short-circuit pin TP3 (2P, yellow) on the indoor unit control PCB.

(4) Setting No. [6]

Open the cover of the electrical component box, and connect the supplied shortcircuit connector (2P, yellow) to short-circuit pin TP6 (2P, white) on the indoor unit control PCB.

7-15


7

7-7. Remote Controller Servicing FunctionsThe remote controller includes a number of servicing functions. Use these as needed for test runs and inspections.

List of Servicing FunctionsFunctions Description Button operation Reset operation Unit status

Test runOperation with forced thermostat ON

Press and hold the button for 4 seconds or longer.

Press the button.

Current operation is maintained.

Sensor temperature display

Temperature display from each sensor

Press and hold the and buttons for 4 seconds or longer.

Servicing check display

Alarm history display Press and hold the and buttons for 4 seconds or longer.

Simple settings

Filter lifetime, operating mode priority, central control address, and other settings

Press and hold the and buttons for 4 seconds or longer.

When settings are made from a remote controller, the indoor unit where that remote controller is connected stops.

Detailed settings

System address, indoor unit address, central control address, and other settings

Press and hold the , and buttons for 4 seconds or longer.

Automatic address

Automatic address setting based on command from the wired remote controller

Press and hold the and the timer operation buttons for 4 seconds or longer.

Automatic reset

Entire system stops.

Address change

Change of indoor unit address

Press and hold the and the timer operation buttons for 4 seconds or longer.

Press the button.

•

7-8. Test Run FunctionOperates the unit with the thermostat forced ON.

<Procedure>

1 Press and hold the button for 4 seconds or longer.

2 “Test” appears on the remote controller LCD display (Fig. 7-3).

3 Start operation.


Fig. 7-3

RCS-TM80BG

2

3

1 4

7-16


7

The procedure below displays the sensor temperatures from the remote controller, indoor unit, and outdoor unit on the remote controller.

<Procedure>

1 Press and hold the and buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or longer.

2 The unit No. “X-X” (main unit No.), item code “XX” (sensor address), and servicing monitor “ ” (sensor temperature) are displayed on the remote controller LCD display. (See Fig. 7-4 at right.)

3 Press the temperature setting / buttons and select the item code to the address of the sensor to monitor.(For the relationships between the sensor addresses and sensor types, refer to the table of temperature sensors and addresses at below.)

4 If group control is in effect, press the button to select the unit to monitor.Press the temperature setting buttons to select the item code to change.


Sensor Temperature Display Function(displayed regardless of whether unit is operating or stopped)

RCS-TM80BG1

2

3

45

Note:

The temperature display appears as “- - - -” for units that are not connected.

If monitor mode is engaged while normal operation is in progress, only the parts of the LCD display shown in the figure will change. Other parts continue to display the same information as during normal operation.

*

Fig. 7-4

Indoor unit sensors Outdoor unit sensors

02 Intake temp. Unit No.1 Unit No.2 Unit No.3 Unit No.4

03 E1 0A 2A 4A 6A Discharge temp. 1

04 E2 0B 2B 4B 6B Discharge temp. 2

05 E3 0C 2C 4C 6C High-pressure sensor temp.

06 Discharge temp. 0D 2D 4D 6D Heat exchanger gas 1

07 Discharge temp. setting 0E 2E 4E 6E Heat exchanger liquid 1

08Position of indoor unit electronic control valve

0F 2F 4F 6F Heat exchanger gas 2

10 30 50 70 Heat exchanger liquid 2

11 31 51 71 Outdoor air temp.

12 32 52 72 –

13 33 53 73 For inspection

14 34 54 74 CT2



17 37 57 77 Discharge temp. 3

18 38 58 78 CT3


1A 3A 5A 7A For inspection

1B 3B 5B 7B Heat exchanger gas 3

1C 3C 5C 7C Heat exchanger liquid 3

1D 3D 5D 7D Low-pressure sensor temp.

1E 3E 5E 7E Receiver temp.

1F 3F 5F 7F Oil 1

20 40 60 80 Oil 2

21 41 61 81 Oil 3


7-17


8

Warning

8-1. Warning about Installation of Receivers .................................................................. 8-2

8-2. Warning about Installing Remote Controls .............................................................. 8-2

RCS-SH80BG.WL for 4-Way Cassette (X Type)

8-3. Installing the Receiver Unit ....................................................................................... 8-3

8-4. Accessories ................................................................................................................ 8-4

8-5. Wiring the Receiver Unit ........................................................................................... 8-4

8-6. Precautions on Simultaneous Installation of Wired Remote Controller and

Wireless Remote Controller ...................................................................................... 8-4

8-7. Test Operation ............................................................................................................. 8-5

8-8. Setting Address Switches ......................................................................................... 8-5

RCS-TRP80BG.WL for Ceiling Mounted (T Type)


8-10. Accessories ................................................................................................................ 8-7


8-12. Precautions on Simultaneous Installation of Wired Remote Controller and

Wireless Remote Controller ....................................................................................... 8-7

8-13. Test Operation ............................................................................................................. 8-8

8-14. Setting Address Switches ......................................................................................... 8-8

RCS-BH80BG.WL for XM, U and US Types

8-15. Accessories ................................................................................................................ 8-9



8-18. Setting Address Switches ........................................................................................ 8-11

8-19. Test Operation ............................................................................................................. 8-11

Common to All Models

8-20. The Self-Diagnosis Function Display and What is Detected .................................. 8-12

8-21. Room Temperature Sensor Settings ........................................................................ 8-12

8-22. Setting Up Remote Control Functions ..................................................................... 8-13

8. HOW TO INSTALL THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER RECEIVER

8-1


8

Warning

8-1. Warning about Installation of Receivers

The wireless remote uses a very weak infrared light for its signal, which can result in the signal not being received

because of the following influences, so take care in where the unit is installed.

· Inverter or rapid-start type fluorescent lights. (Models without glow lamps)

· Plasma display or LCD televisions.

· Direct sunlight or other sources of bright light.

8-2. Warning about Installing Remote Controls

(1) If a remote control is to be operated from a remote control holder that is hung on a wall, turn on the lights in the room as well as any electrical appliances and then check to make sure the air conditioner works with the remote control in the location where it will be installed. If it works, continue with installation.

(2) If the air conditioner is to be switched from the main sensor to a remote control sensor, pay attention to the

following when installing.

· Locate where no warm or cold drafts will affect it.

· Locate in a place free from direct sunlight.

· Locate where it will not be affected by any other heat/cold source.

8-2


8

RCS-SH80BG.WL for 4-Way Cassette (X Type)

8-3. Installing the Receiver Unit

The receiver can only be installed on the corner indicated in Fig. 8-1, so consider how the panel will face when it is

installed on the indoor unit.

(1) Remove the air inlet grill.

(2) Remove the screw holding the adjustable corner cap, slide the cap to the side and remove it. (Fig. 8-2)

(3) A packing is stuffed into the square hole through which the panel wiring passes; temporarily remove the sponge

packing and pass the wire sticking out from the wireless receiver through the grill. Hold the wire in place with the enclosed clamp by tightening the screw, then stuff the sponge back in place. (Fig. 8-3)

If this packing is not put back, condensation may form on the wire, so it is absolutely necessary to put the sponge packing back in place before continuing with the installation.

(4) After wiring according to the directions in “8-5. Wiring the Receiver Unit”, leave enough wiring so the receiver’s adjustable corner cap can be removed and fasten the cable clamp with its screw. (Fig. 8-3)

(5) Install the panel on the receiver. When doing so, slide the panel so its tabs fit into their 3 places. Also, take care so the wire does not get pinched. (Fig. 8-4)

Refer to the Installation Manual packed with the panel.

(1) If the wiring for the receiver is bundled with other wires, such as the incoming line, it may cause a malfunction, so avoid putting them together.

(2) If something causes the unit’s power source to make noise it will be necessary to resolve the problem, such as by installing a noise filter.

For more information about wiring or test operation, refer to “8-5. Wiring the Receiver Unit” and “8-7. Test Operation”.

Fig. 8-1 Fig. 8-2

Fig. 8-3

Fig. 8-4

Receiver installation Location

Box with Indoor Unit’s Electrical Parts

Ceiling PanelAdjustable Corner Cap

Adjustable Corner CapScrew

Remove the sponge packing, fasten the wirewith the cable clamp and put the spongepacking back in place.

NOTE

8-3


8

8-4. Accessories

8-5. Wiring the Receiver Unit

Connections

Connect the wires from the receiver to the remote control terminal strip on the indoor unit. (Polarity does not

matter)

8-6. Precautions on Simultaneous Installation of Wired Remote Controller and Wireless Remote Controller

By installing a wired remote controller, the wireless remote controller kit can permit dual remote control operation at the same time.

(Up to 2 units of remote controllers – a wireless kit and a wired unit – can be installed.)

Dual remote control operation can control 1 or multiple air conditioners using several remote controllers.

No. Accessories Quantity1 Receiver 1

2 Remote Controller 1

3 Remote Control Holder 1

No. Accessories Quantity4 AAA alkaline batteries 2

5 Users Manual 1

6 Truss Self-Tapping Screws4 X 16

2

7 Cable clamp 1

8 Clamp fixing screw 4 X 12 1

DO112

23

Receiver PCBIndoor Unit

Terminal Strip for Wiring Remote Controls

WhiteBlack

CAUTION Be sure to determine the correct terminal numbers on the indoor unit when wiring

the remote controller. The remote controller will be damaged if high voltage (such as 220 – 240 VAC) is applied.

The wireless remote controller kit components cannot be used for more than 1 indoor unit at a time. (However, separate receiver units may be used simultane-ously.)

When a wireless remote controller kit and a wired remote controller are used simultaneously, assign either the wireless remote controller or the wired remote controller as the sub remote controller unit.

Wiring Diagram

(1) To assign the wired remote controller as the sub unit, locate the address connector at the rear of the wired remote controller PCB and disconnect it. Reconnect it to the sub unit position.

(2) To assign the wireless remote controller as the sub unit, locate the dip switch [S003] on the wire-less receiver unit PCB. Set the No. 3 switch to the ON position.

Screw

Cable clamp

PCB Cover

Receiver PCB

AdjustableCorner Cap

S003Bit 3: OFF ON

ON 1 2 3 4

Fig. 8-5

8-4


8

When 1 indoor unit is operated by 2 remote controls:

CN11 2 1 2

Wireless Remote Control Kit Wired Remote Control

Receiver

(Sold Separately) (Sold Separately)

Remote Control Wiring (Field Supply)

Indoor Unit

Groundingwire Earth

(Main) (Sub)

Either of the remotes can be set to main/sub.

CN11 2 1 2

If a group of units are to be controlled by 2 remote controls;

Main/sub remote controls will work regardless of which indoor unit they are installed to.

Wireless Remote Control Kit

Wired Remote Control

1st Indoor Unit

2nd Indoor Unit

3rd Indoor Unit

4th Indoor Unit

(Main)

Groundingwire (Earth)

Cross-wiring Remotes for Group Control (Field Supply)

(Sub )

Fig. 8-6

8-7. Test Operation

Fig. 8-7

8-8. Setting Address Switches

1. Turn the #1 DIP switch [S003] on the receiver PCB from OFF to ON and operate the wireless remote control with its Start/Stop button.

2. During a test run, all display lamps on the display will light up.

3. During a test run, it is not possible to adjust the temperature.

4. After completing a test run, be absolutely sure to turn the #1 DIP switch from ON to OFF and make sure none of the display lamps are blinking. Also, replace the PCB cover back as it was and fasten it; while holding the wiring with the cable clamp, tighten its screw.

When more than one receiver and remote control are installed in the same room, setting up addresses allows them to avoid interfering with each other.

Refer to the Users Manual for information on how to change the addresses of the remote controls.

Changing the address of a receiver can be done after removing the screw to the receiver PCB cover. Once the change is complete, put the cover back in place; while holding the wiring with the cable clamp, tighten its screw.

Address Display on the Remote Control

Position of the Receiver’sAddress Switch

It doesn’t matter where the receiver’s address switch is.

4-6

S00

1S

002

1-3 4-6

S00

1

1-3 4-6

S00

1

1-3

36

2 54

1

S00

2

36

2 54

1

S00

2

36

2 54

1

Screw

Cable clamp

PCB Cover

Receiver PCB

AdjustableCorner Cap

S003Bit 1: OFF ON

ON 1 2 3 4

(1) This is hard on the device, so only use this for the test run.

(2) After turning on the power, the unit will not receive any commands from the remote control for about 1 minute. This is not an error. (In fact it does receive signals, but they are cancelled.)

NOTE

Use wiring of 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 for field supply. Use a total wire length of no more than 400 m.

Use wiring of 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 for field supply. Make the total wire length when cross-wiring a group

no more than 200 m.

8-5


8

RCS-TRP80BG.WL for Ceiling Mounted (T Type)

8-9. Installing the Receiver Unit

Vinyl tape

Flat head screwdriver (Wrapped with vinyl tape)

Lid

Insert into groove on side below " O " mark.

Clamp

Receiver

Clamp

Terminal board

Panel

Side panel

Air inlet grille

NOTE

Do not twist the control wiring with the power wiring because this may cause malfunction. Install a noise filter or take other appropriate action if electrical noise disturbs the unit’s power supply circuit.

* For the wiring and test run procedures, refer to “Wiring the Receiver Unit” and “Test Run.”

Fig. 8-9Fig. 8-8

Fig. 8-11Fig. 8-10

(1) Open the air inlet grille on the side panel, remove the 1 screw and then move it toward the front (direction of the arrow) and remove it. (Fig. 8-8)

(2) Wrap the tip of a flat head screwdriver with vinyl tape and then slip it into the side of and under where " O " marking is printed on the lid, wiggling the lid free. (Fig. 8-9) (Be careful not to scratch the panel.)

(3) After passing the lead wire through the panel, install the receiver in the hole of the panel. (The projecting parts of the receiver is held in the hole of the panel.)

(4) Fasten the receiver’s lead wire to the clamp that is holding the wire from the louver motor. (Fig. 8-10)

(5) Attach the side panel.

(6) Put the receiver’s lead wire together with other wires such as the louver motor wire and fasten them to the clamp. (Fig. 8-11)

Use the hole in the upper part of the wiring box to lead it in.

8-6


8

8-10. Accessories

8-11. Wiring the Receiver Unit

Connections

Connect the wires from the receiver to the remote control terminal strip on the indoor unit.

(Polarity does not matter)

CN001

23

Receiver PCBIndoor Unit

Terminal Strip for Wiring Remote Controls

2RWhiteWhiteBlack

CAUTION

Be sure to determine the correct terminal numbers on the indoor unit when wiring the remote controller. The remote controller will be damaged if high voltage (such as 220 – 240 VAC) is applied.

The wireless receiver unit components cannot be used for more than 1 indoor unit at a time. (However, separate receiver units may be used simultaneously.)

When a wireless receiver unit and a wired remote controller are used simultane-ously, assign either the wireless remote controller or the wired remote controller as the sub remote controller unit.

Wiring Diagram

No. Accessories Quantity Accessories Quantity1 Receiver 1


3 Remote Control Holder 1

No.4 AAA alkaline batteries 2

5 Users Manual 1


2

7 Cable tie 1

(1) To assign the wired remote controller as the sub unit, locate the address connector at the rear of the wired remote controller PCB and disconnect it. Reconnect it to the sub unit position.

(2) To assign the wireless remote controller as the sub unit, locate the DIP switch [S003] on the wireless control unit. Set the No. 3 switch to the ON position.

8-12. Precautions on Simultaneous Installation of Wired Remote Controller and Wireless Remote Controller

By installing a wired remote controller, the wireless receiver unit can permit dual remote control operation at the same time.(Up to 2 units of remote controllers – a wireless remote controller and a wired remote controller – can be installed.)

Dual remote control operation can control 1 or multiple air conditioners using several remote controllers.

1234

S003Bit 3: OFF ON

1234

ON

Fig. 8-12

8-7


8

Fig. 8-138-13. Test Operation

When 1 indoor unit is operated by 2 remote controls:

CN11 2 1 2

Wireless Remote Control Kit Wired Remote Control

Receiver

(Sold Separately) (Sold Separately)

Remote Control Wiring (Field Supply)

Indoor Unit

Groundingwire Earth

(Main) (Sub)

Either of the remotes can be set to main/sub.

CN11 2 1 2

If a group of units are to be controlled by 2 remote controls;

Main/sub remote controls will work regardless of which indoor unit they are installed to.

Wireless Remote Control Kit

Wired Remote Control

1st Indoor Unit

2nd Indoor Unit

3rd Indoor Unit

4th Indoor Unit

(Main)

Groundingwire (Earth)

Cross-wiring Remotes for Group Control (Field Supply)

(Sub )


Fig. 8-14




S001

1 2 34 5 6

1 2 34 5 6

1 2 34 5 6

S002 S001 S002 S001 S002

1234S003

Bit 1: OFF ON

1234

ON

1. Turn the #1 DIP switch [S003] on the receiver PCB from OFF to ON and operate the wireless remote control with its Start/Stop button.

2. During a test run, all display lamps on the display will light up.

3. During a test run, it is not possible to adjust the temperature.

4. After completing a test run, be absolutely sure to turn the #1 DIP switch from ON to OFF and make sure none of the display lamps are blinking. Also, replace the PCB cover back as it was and fasten it; while holding the wiring with the cable clamp, tighten its screw.

(1) This is hard on the device, so only use this for the test run.

(2) After turning on the power, the unit will not receive any commands from the remote control for about 1 minute. This is not an error. (In fact it does receive signals, but they are cancelled.)

NOTE


Refer to the Users Manual for information on how to change the addresses of the remote controls. Changing the address of a receiver can be done after removing the screw to the receiver PCB cover. Once the

change is complete, put the cover back in place; while holding the wiring with the cable clamp, tighten its screw.

Use wiring of 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 for field supply. Use a total wire length of no more than 400 m.

Use wiring of 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 for field supply. Make the total wire length when cross-wiring a group

no more than 200 m.

8-8


8

RCS-BH80BG.WL for XM, U and US Types

8-15. Accessories

No. Accessories Quantity1 Receiver

(Enclosed 200 mm wiring)1


3 Remote Controller's Holder 1

4 AAA alkaline batteries 2

No. Accessories Quantity4 Users Manual 1


2

6 Machine screws 2

7 Wood screws 2

8 Cable tie 1

8-16. Installing the Receiver Unit When using a separately installed receiver as a built-in model, install it to the JIS switch box (field supply) shown in the diagram on the right, which has been built into the wall on site in advance.

(1) Remove the face plate of the receiver by slipping a flat head screwdriver or the like into the cutout on the bottom.

(2) Install the receiver with the 2 enclosed machine screws (M4).

(3) Connect the receiver’s wiring (2 cores) with the wiring from the indoor unit. (Refer to “8-17. Wiring the Receiver Unit”.) When wiring receivers, be sure to double-check the terminal numbers of the indoor unit before connecting them so there are no mistakes in the wiring. (Damage will occur if high volt-age [e.g. supply voltage] is applied.)

(4) Attach the face plate.

M4 X 25 Machine screws (2)

Receiver Unit

Spacers

Single outlet switch box (no cover)Face PlateCutout

Fig. 8-15

When using a separately installed receiver as an exposed model, attach it to a wall where the receiver can be affixed.

(1) Put a flat head screwdriver or the like into the groove on the bottom of the receiver unit and twist it to remove the bottom of the case. (Fig. 8-16)

(2) To enable the receiver’s wiring to stick out from the upper part of the case (thin part at center-top), use side-cutters or the like to cut a hole in the case big enough for the remote control cord (sold separately). (Fig. 8-17)

(3) Disconnect the wires that were connected at shipment from the connector.

(4) After installing the remote control cord (sold separately) at the position in Fig. 8-18 with the enclosed cable tie,connect it to the connector on the receiver.

(5) Shape the remote control cord at the top of the PCB so it fits inside the receiver and after configuring the wiring like it is in Fig. 8-19, attach the lower case. When doing this, arrange the head of the cable tie so it faces side-ways.

(6) Remove the face plate and use the woodscrews (2) to install the receiver unit.

(7) Use the cord clip that comes enclosed with the remote control cord to fasten it to the wall.

(8) Attach the face plate.Outlet in the upper part of the case for the remote control cord

Cable tie (Enclosed)

Connector Remote Control Cord (Sold Separately)

About 2 to 3 mmRemote Control Cord (Sold Separately)Cable tie

(Enclosed)Wood screws

(2)

Receiver Unit

Fig. 8-18

Fig. 8-19

Fig. 8-16 Fig. 8-17

8-9


8

When using a receiver that has been installed separately into the ceiling,use the enclosed fittings for installing to a ceiling.

(1) Remove the metal plate of the receiver by slipping a flathead screwdriver or the like into the cutout on the bottom.

(2) Cut out a hole in the ceiling to match the dimensions of the enclosed template. (95 X 51 mm)

(3) Pass the wiring through the enclosed installation metal fitting and put it into the hole. (Fig. 8-20)

(4) Bend parts A and B of the metal fitting so they hold onto the ceiling firmly. (Fig. 8-21)

(5) Connect the receiver’s wiring (2 cores) with the wiring from the indoor unit. (Refer to “8-17. Wiring the Receiver Unit”.) When wiring receivers, be sure to double-check the terminal num-bers of the indoor unit before connecting them so there are no mistakes in the wiring. (Damage will occur if high voltage [e.g. supply voltage] is applied.)

(6) Adjust the enclosed spacers so they are several millimeters thicker than the ceiling material and hold the receiver in place temporarily with the 2 enclosed machine screws. (M4 X 40)

(7) Bend parts A and B back so they fit in the opening and are in the gap between the surface of the ceiling and the receiver; then tighten the screws. Do not use too much force when tighten-ing the screws. Doing so may warp or damage the case. Move the receiver by hand and check that it can move just a little. (Fig. 8-22)

(8) Attach the face plate.

Fig. 8-20

-+

-+

Fig. 8-21

Part A

Part B

Fig. 8-228-17. Wiring the Receiver Unit

Use wiring of 0.5 mm2 to 2 mm2 for field supply. Use a total wire length of no more than 400 m. Polarity does not matter.If it is to be used as an embedded model;

Enclosed wire joints (2, white)

Terminal strip for wiring the remote control of the indoor unit

Connections

Receiver wires (Field supply)

Wires from the receiver unit

Receiver

WhiteBlack

12

12

Wiring Diagram

1. Strip the wire to be connected of its sheathing for 14 mm.

2. Twist the two wires together and crimp the enclosed wire joint.

3. If a special crimping tool is not used, or if the connection is made using solder, wrap the joint with insulating tape.

Receiver wires(Field supply)

Wire joint CE-1 (Enclosed)

Receiver wires(Field supply)

If it is to be used as an exposed model:

12

12

Receiver

Terminal strip for wiring the remote control of the indoor unit

Remote Control Cord (Sold Separately)

WhiteBlack

Wiring Diagram

Use remote control cord (sold separately) for wiring a separately installed receiver.

(1) For instructions on how to install a remote control cord (sold separately), refer to the chapter on Using as an Embedded Model in Installing Separate Receivers.

(2) If a remote control cord (sold separately) is to be used, refer to the Mounting Instructions attached to the remote control cord.

NOTE

1. When wiring remote controls, be sure to double-check the terminal numbers of the indoor unit connecting them so there are no mistakes in the wiring. (Damage will occur if high voltage [e.g. supply voltage] is applied.)

2. If the wiring to the operation panel is bundled together with other wiring, such as the incoming line from the power source, it can cause a malfunction, so avoid doing so.

3. If something causes the unit’s power source to make noise it will be necessary to resolve the problem, such as by installing a noise filter.

8-10


8



Refer to the Users Manual for information on how to change the addresses of the remote controls.

Changing the address of a receiver can be done after removing the screw to the receiver’s PCB cover. Once the change is complete, put the cover back in place; while holding the wiring with the cable clamp, tighten its screw.




1 2 3

4 5 6 4 5 6

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

(1) Remove the face plate of the receiver’s PCB and turn the DIP switch to RUN/On (Down Up) and operate the wireless remote control with its Start/Stop button.

(2) During a test run, all display lamps on the display will light up.

(3) During a test run, it is not possible to adjust the temperature.

(4) After completing a test run, be absolutely sure to return the Test Run switch to OFF (Up Down) and make sure none of the display lamps are blinking. Also, put the face plate back in place.

8-19. Test Operation

NOTE

1. This is hard on the device, so only use this for the test run.

2. After turning on the power, the unit will not receive any commands from the remote control for about 1 minute.This is not an error. (In fact it does receive signals, but they are cancelled.)

3. Make sure to operate while the indoor unit is stopped.

4. The address of indoor unit is set to "ALL" at the time of the shipment.

8-11


8

Common to All Models

8-20. The Self-Diagnosis Function Display and What is Detected

Alarm Display in the table below indicates the content of alarms that are displayed when a wired remote control is connected. For information on how to deal with the alarms, refer to the Mounting Instructions for the indoor unit or to Test Run or servicing materials.

: Off / : On / : Blinking (0.5 sec. intervals)

Error Detected WL Remote Control LED Display

Alarm Display Run Timer Standby Blinking

Communication error in the remote control circuit E01–E03, E08–E14, E17, E18

Communication error either in the in/outdoor operation line or the sub-bus of the outdoor unit

E04–E07, E15, E16, E19–E31

Operation of indoor protection device P01, P09–P14 Alternately

Operation of outdoor protection device P02–P08, P15–P31 Alternately

Error in the indoor thermistor F01–F03, F10–F11 Alternately

Error in the outdoor thermistor F04–F09, F12–F28 Alternately

Error in the indoor EEPROM F29 Simultaneously

Error in the outdoor EEPROM F30, F31 Simultaneously

Error related to the compressor H01–H31

Error in indoor settings L01–L03 L05–L09 Simultaneously

Error in outdoor settings L04, L10–L31 Simultaneously

Inconsistency in Air/Heat (Including an auto-temp setting for a model without auto-temp settings)

Alternately

Oil Alarm (Same as operation of outdoor protection device) Alternately

Test Run Simultaneously

When using RCS-BH80BG.WLIf you have either an outdoor maintenance remote control or a wired remote control and a service checker special wiring (8540-5280-579-00: for service use) at hand, you can get more detailed information about an alarm by connecting one to the service connecter as in the diagram. For information such as how to connect to receivers, etc., refer to the Users Manual that came attached with the service checker special wiring.

ServiceConnector

Fig. 8-23

Sensor Button

Fig. 8-24

8-21. Room Temperature Sensor Settings Common to All Models

The indoor unit and the wireless remote control are equipped with indoor temperature sensors. The sensing of indoor temperature works via one of them.

When the unit is shipped, it is set to the indoor unit, but to switch to the remote control, press the sensor button (diagram at right) inside the remote control’s cover and then check to make sure that Main Sensor on the LCD screen goes off.

Even when the sensor switch has been set to the remote control, if the unit does not receive any room temperature data from the remote control for ten minutes, it automatically switches back to the indoor unit sensor, so be sure to install the remote control facing the receiver.

NOTE

8-12


8

The operation of the air conditioner can be impacted, depending on the settings made, so only service personnel should make the settings.Furthermore, making changes to these settings may cause actual operation to deviate from what is printed in the Users Manual, so be sure to explain this to the customer fully.

Making Settings (Do with unit stopped)

(1) Holding down the Swing/Wind Direction + OFF Timer + Mode Select buttons at the same time for 4 or more seconds makes the display switch to the setting screen. (See diagram below.)

(2) Use the Temperature setting buttons, , to select the number of the item to be set.

(3) Use the ON Timer buttons, , to change settings.

(4) The settings are saved with the Once/Every Day button. When this is done, the settings display of the LCD changes from blinking to light.

(5) If other settings are to be changed as well, repeat steps 2 to 4.

(6) When all settings have been made, press the Start/Stop button.

Example: Operation mode setting screen

Item Number & Setting Item Setting Content Setting when Shipped

1 Operation Mode

2 Flap Display

3 Select Fan Speed

4 Display of Set Temperature

°C °F Setting Off (Note 2) °C

5 Time Display 24 Hour (No Display) AM/PM 24 Hour

6 Ventilation Fan ON/OFF Off (No Display) On OFF(Note 3)

7 Cool temp Max 18 – 30°C 30

8 Cool temp Min 18 – 30°C 18

9 Heat temp Max 16 – 30°C 30 (Note 4)

10 Heat temp Min 16 – 30°C 16

11 Dry temp Max 18 – 30°C 30

12 Dry temp Min 18 – 30°C 18

13 Auto temp Max 17 – 27°C 27

14 Auto temp Min 17 – 27°C 17

15 Address Setting Max Value

00 (ALL only) 01 – 31 06 (Note 5)

16 Heat temp Max ON/OFF JP (Heater Max Temp Change Off) EP (On)

JP

1

4

3

2

6

(Note 1) (No Display)

(No Display)

ItemNumber

/

/

8-22. Setting Up Remote Control Functions

(1) While the unit is in the swinging mode (Swing/Wind Direction), the flap cannot be stopped in a desired position.(2) When Setting OFF is selected, "°C" is displayed on the LCD screen.(3) You can toggle between ON and OFF by pressing Ventilation for 4 seconds or more.(4) If the Heater Max ON/OFF setting is not changed to EP (ON), the setting change will not be reflected.(5) This is the number of addresses that can be set in the address change mode. Do not set it to 07 or above.

NOTE

The functions of the wireless remote can be set on site.(These settings are saved in nonvolatile memory in the remote control, so even when its batteries are changed, the settings do not revert to the defaults.)

NOTE

8-13


SANYO Electric Co., Ltd.Printed in Japan200805E DC


technical data & service manual

Documents